1. Home
  2. Jeep®
  3. Jeep® 2020 Gladiator User Manual

Jeep® 2020 Gladiator Sport S

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
Main documentSpecificationQuestions and answersRelateds Products
2020 Gladiator photo

User Manual

This is the main product document for model 2020 Gladiator.

The file format is pdf, 476 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2020 GLADIATOR
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_JT_OM_EN_USC
Second Edition V1
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2020 ALL-NEW GLADIATOR
owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
ALL-NEW
mopar.com/om
background
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
background
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...
.............................................................................. 10
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...
...................................................107
4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 131
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...
............................................................................................193
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...
................................................................................................. 272
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................306
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...
.........................................................................................354
9 MULTIMEDIA ...
............................................................................................................................361
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................457
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................461
background
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................. 9
Essential Information ...
................................. 9
Symbols .
......................................................... 9
RO
L
LOVER WARNING ...
........................................ 9
CAMPERS ................................................................9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...
..............................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............10
KEYS ......................................................................11
Key Fob......................................................... 11
IG
NITION SWITCH ...
............................................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................14
Vehicle On Message ...
................................ 15
Depleted Key Fob Battery .
.
.
........................16
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...
.....................................................16
How To Use Remote Start ...
........................17
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped .
..
................................................ 17
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...
...................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle .
..
.................................. 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .
......................................................... 18
Re
mote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .
..
............................................... 18
General Information ...
................................. 18
SENTRY KEY...
....................................................... 19
Customer Key Programming...
.................... 19
Replacement Keys ...
.................................. 20
General Information .
.
.
................................. 20
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED ...
. 20
To Arm The System ..................................... 21
To Disarm The System ...
............................ 21
Rearming Of The System.
.
.
.......................... 21
DOORS .................................................................. 21
Ma
nual Door Locks...
................................... 22
Power Door Locks — If Equipped .
.
.
............ 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) .
..
............................................. 23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ...
..... 26
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .
..
................................................ 26
Front Door Removal .
.
.
............................... 27
Rear Door Removal ...
................................ 29
SEATS ................................................................ 31
Ma
nual Front Seats..................................... 32
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...
.................... 33
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat ...
............... 34
Rear Seat Stadium Position.
.
.
..................... 35
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ...
............ 36
HEAD RESTRAINTS .
.
.
......................................... 36
Front Head Restraints ...
.............................. 37
Rear Head Restraints...
............................... 37
STEERING WHEEL .
.
.
............................................. 38
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...
......... 38
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .
.
.
... 39
MIRRORS...............................................................40
In
side Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped...
.... 40
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ...
40
Outside Mirrors .
.
.
........................................ 40
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...
................... 41
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .
.
.
................. 41
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ...
....................... 41
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .
.
.
...........................................42
Headlight Switch...
....................................... 42
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .
..
............................................... 42
High/Low Beam Switch ...
.......................... 42
Flash-To-Pass .
.
.
.......................................... 42
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...
...... 42
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...
................ 43
Turn Signals .
.
.
.............................................. 43
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ...
.......... 43
Lights-On Reminder.
.
.
.................................. 43
Bed Lights — If Equipped ...
......................... 43
INTERIOR LIGHTS .
.
.
.............................................44
Courtesy Lights ...
......................................... 44
Dimmer Controls.
.
.
....................................... 44
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...
.........45
Windshield Wiper Operation ...
.................... 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS .
.
.
.........................................46
Manual Climate Control Overview ...
........... 46
Automatic Climate Controls Overview ...
..... 50
Climate Control Functions.
.
.
........................ 57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .
..
.............................................. 57
Operating Tips ...
.......................................... 58
background
3
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..................59
Auto-Down Feature ...
.................................. 60
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped .
..
................................................ 60
Wind Buffeting ...
......................................... 60
DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED .
.
.
.............................60
Removing The Hard Top...
........................... 61
Installing The Hard Top .
.
.
............................ 63
Installing The Soft Top...
..............................63
Removing The Soft Top ...
............................ 66
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED ...
..............................67
Front Panel(s) Removal............................... 67
Freedom Top Storage Bag ...
....................... 68
Front Panel(s) Installation...
........................69
Rear Hard Top Removal .
.
.
........................... 69
Rear Hard Top Installation ...
....................... 71
DOOR FRAME .
.
.
....................................................71
Door Frame Removal...
................................ 72
Door Frame Installation.
.
.
............................ 72
SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED...
.................................74
Lowering The Soft Top................................. 75
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped .
..
............................................... 79
Raising The Soft Top.
.
.
................................. 80
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ...
....................................83
Lowering The Windshield ............................ 84
Raising The Windshield ...
............................ 86
HOOD ..................................................................86
Op
ening The Hood ....................................... 86
Closing The Hood...
...................................... 86
TAILGATE............................................................... 87
Op
ening ........................................................ 87
Th
ree-Position Tailgate...
............................. 87
Closing.
......................................................... 88
G
A
RAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED ...
..................................................... 89
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®...
............................................... 89
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming...
.. 91
Using HomeLink®...
..................................... 92
Security.
........................................................ 92
T
r
oubleshooting Tips ...
................................ 92
General Information .
.
.
................................. 93
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT...
..................................... 94
Storage ......................................................... 94
Cu
pholders.
.
.
................................................ 97
Electrical Power Outlet ...
......................... 97
Power Inverters — If Equipped .
.
.
................ 99
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ...
..........100
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...
....................................................102
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED....................102
Tonneau Cover Installation...
....................103
Tonneau Cover Removal ...
........................104
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .
.
.
.......106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................107
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............109
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...
................. 110
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ......................................................110
Oi
l Life Reset — If Equipped .
.
.
................111
Off Road+ Display — If Equipped...
...........112
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items.
..........................................................113
In
strument Cluster Display Menu Items .
.
1
13
Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode
Message, And Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped) .
..
..............................117
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...
............ 118
Red Warning Lights ...................................118
Yellow Warning Lights ...
............................122
Yellow Indicator Lights ...
...........................125
Green Indicator Lights.
.
.
............................126
White Indicator Lights ...
............................127
Blue Indicator Lights .
.
.
..............................128
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...
. 129
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...
..........................................129
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...
..................................................... 130
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 131
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................131
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System...
.132
background
4
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 140
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ...
.............................................140
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped.
..
.........................144
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) .
....................................................147
OC
CUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .
.
.
............... 153
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...
.153
Important Safety Precautions ...
................153
Seat Belt Systems .
.
.
..................................154
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...
161
Child Restraints .
.
.
.....................................177
Transporting Pets ...
.................................189
SAFETY TIPS ...
................................................. 189
Transporting Passengers ..........................189
Exhaust Gas .
.
.
.......................................189
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .
..
.............................................190
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle.
..
................................192
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................... 193
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...
....193
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .
.
.
193
Normal Starting ...
...................................193
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) .
.................................................196
If
Engine Fails To Start ...
.........................196
After Starting.
.
.
...........................................196
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...
....197
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...
....197
PARKING BRAKE ...
...........................................198
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .....199
Shifting .......................................................200
Dow
nshifting .
.
.
...........................................201
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED ...
..................................................203
Ignition Park Interlock ...
............................204
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .
......................................................204
Ei
ght–Speed Automatic Transmission ...
..204
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .
.
.
...............209
Four-Position Transfer Case...
...................209
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ...
.........212
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models .
.
.
.212
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped .
..
.............................................213
Off Road+ — If Equipped ...
........................214
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING .
.
.
...215
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ...
....................215
Automatic Mode.........................................216
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .
....................................................217
To
Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode.
..........................................................217
To
Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.
.......................................................218
To
Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.
.......................................................218
Sy
stem Malfunction...
................................218
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) ...
................................................. 218
Automatic Mode ........................................219
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .
....................................................219
To
Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .
.........................................................220
To
Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.
.......................................................220
SP
EED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .
.
.
................ 221
To Activate.................................................. 221
To
Set A Desired Speed .
.
.
.........................221
To Vary The Speed Setting...
.....................221
To Accelerate For Passing ...
.....................222
To Resume Speed .
.
.
.................................223
To Deactivate .
.
.
.........................................223
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ...
................................................. 223
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation ...................................................224
Ac
tivating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC).
..........................................................225
To
Activate/Deactivate...
...........................225
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.
.
.
..................226
To Cancel ...................................................226
To
Turn Off ...
..............................................226
To Resume .
.
.
..............................................227
To Vary The Speed Setting ...
....................227
Setting The Following Distance In ACC .
.
.
.228
Overtake Aid...
............................................230
background
5
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only) ...
.................................230
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ...
.....230
Display Warnings And Maintenance.
.
.
......231
Precautions While Driving With ACC...
......232
General Information .
.
.
...............................235
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode.
..........................................................235
PA
RKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...
.................................................. 237
ParkSense Sensors ...................................237
ParkSense Warning Display...
...................237
ParkSense Display.
.
.
..................................238
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...
.......240
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System.
.......................................................240
Cl
eaning The ParkSense System...
...........240
ParkSense System Usage Precautions .
.
.
.241
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ...
.................................. 242
ParkSense Sensors ...
................................242
ParkSense Warning Display...
...................242
ParkSense Display.
.
.
..................................242
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...
.......245
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System.
.......................................................246
Cl
eaning The ParkSense System.
.
.
...........246
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ...
.246
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...
........ 247
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED................ 249
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...
............................. 250
Fuel Filler Cap ...
.......................................250
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ...
.............251
VEHICLE LOADING ...
.......................................251
Certification Label .....................................251
TRAILER TOWING ...
...........................................253
Common Towing Definitions .....................253
Trailer Hitch Classification ...
.....................255
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .
..
...................................256
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...
...................258
Towing Tips.
.
.
..............................................260
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...
......................................261
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................261
Re
creational Towing — Four-Wheel
Drive Models .
..
...........................................262
DRIVING TIPS.
.
.
...................................................264
On-Road Driving Tips ...
..............................264
Off-Road Driving Tips.
.
.
..............................264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ......................272
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....272
General Information ...
...............................276
BULB REPLACEMENT .
.
.
....................................277
Replacement Bulbs ...
............................277
Bulb Replacement ...
................................279
FUSES .
................................................................281
G
e
neral Information ...
...............................281
Power Distribution Center (PDC) ...
...........282
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...
.................... 289
Jack Location ...
.........................................289
Spare Tire Removal .
.
.
...............................291
Preparations For Jacking ...
......................292
Jacking Instructions .
.
.
..............................292
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ...
.....................295
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools .
.
.
............296
JUMP STARTING ...
............................................ 297
Preparations For Jump Start...
..................297
Jump Starting Procedure .
.
.
.......................299
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...
...................... 300
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 301
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...
......................... 302
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...
................... 303
Four–Wheel Drive Models ........................304
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...
..304
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 305
EV
ENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 305
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 306
Maintenance Plan .....................................306
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle...
..............311
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .
.
.
............................. 312
3.6L Engine ...
............................................312
Checking Oil Level ...
.................................313
Adding Washer Fluid .
.
.
............................313
Maintenance-Free Battery ...
....................313
background
6
Pressure Washing......................................314
DEALER SERVICE ...
........................................... 314
Engine Oil ..................................................314
En
gine Oil Filter .
.
.
.....................................315
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...
......................315
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
.
.
.............317
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...
...............318
Body Lubrication .
.
.
...................................320
Windshield Wiper Blades ...
.....................320
Exhaust System ...
.....................................321
Cooling System .
.
.
.......................................323
Brake System ...
.........................................326
Front/Rear Axle Fluid .
.
.
.............................327
Transfer Case ...
.........................................327
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .
.
.
.....327
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...
328
RAISING THE VEHICLE .
.
.
................................. 329
TIRES ................................................................... 329
Ti
re Safety Information ...
........................329
Tires — General Information .
.
.
..................335
Tire Types ...................................................339
Sp
are Tires — If Equipped .
.
.
....................340
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...
...............342
Tire Chains and Traction Devices .
.
.
.........343
Tire Rotation Recommendations ...
..........344
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...
................................. 344
Treadwear ..................................................344
Tr
action Grades ...
......................................345
Temperature Grades .
.
.
..............................345
STORING THE VEHICLE ...
............................... 345
BODYWORK ...
.....................................................346
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ...
..346
Body And Underbody Maintenance...
.......347
Preserving The Bodywork.
.
.
.......................347
INTERIORS ...
......................................................349
Carpet Safety Information.........................349
Carpet Removal ...
......................................350
Seats And Fabric Parts.
.
.
...........................352
Plastic And Coated Parts...
........................352
Leather Parts ...
..........................................353
Glass Surfaces .
.
.
.......................................353
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ...............354
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................354
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ...
...........................................354
Torque Specifications...
.............................354
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .
.
.
.................................355
3.6L Engine...
.............................................355
Reformulated Gasoline ...
.....................356
Materials Added To Fuel .
.
.
......................356
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...
................356
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles .
.....................................................356
CN
G And LP Fuel System
Modifications .
..
..........................................356
MMT In Gasoline...
.....................................357
Fuel System Cautions.
.
.
.............................357
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...
.................357
FLUID CAPACITIES ...
...................................... 358
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...
............................. 358
Engine .......................................................358
Ch
assis .
.....................................................360
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 361
CYBERSECURITY ...
............................................ 361
UCONNECT SETTINGS ...
.................................... 362
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings ...
...............................362
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings .
..
...............................373
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .
..
..............384
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION ...
....... 397
Safety Guidelines.......................................397
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ...
........... 398
Introduction...
.............................................398
Radio Mode.
.
.
.............................................399
Media Mode...
............................................402
Phone Mode.
.
.
............................................404
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ...
........... 410
Introduction................................................410
Radio Mode...
.............................................411
Media Mode...
............................................420
Phone Mode.
.
.
............................................428
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ...
............... 439
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................439
Pitch & Roll...
..............................................440
background
7
Drivetrain....................................................440
Accessory Gauge...
.....................................441
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...
...... 441
Radio Operation.........................................441
Media Mode ...
............................................441
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL .
.
.
............................ 442
Jeep Wireless Speaker - If Equipped ...
.....443
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ............................................................ 449
Re
gulatory And Safety Information...
........449
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................................................... 450
In
troducing Uconnect ................................450
Get Started...
..............................................451
Basic Voice Commands...
..........................452
Radio .
.........................................................452
M
e
dia..........................................................452
Ph
one .
........................................................452
V
oi
ce Text Reply...
......................................453
Climate — If Equipped ...
............................453
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped ...
.......454
Siri® Eyes Free .
.
.
.......................................454
Using Do Not Disturb ...
.............................454
Android Auto™ — If Equipped .
.
.
................454
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ...
..............455
General Information .
.
.
...............................456
Additional Information...
............................456
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...
................................................457
Prepare For The Appointment...
................457
Prepare A List.
.
.
..........................................457
Be Reasonable With Requests ...
..............457
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...
........................... 457
FCA US LLC Customer Center...
................457
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...
........458
In Mexico Contact.
.
.
...................................458
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands...
.......458
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .
..
..................458
Service Contract .
.
.
....................................458
WARRANTY INFORMATION...
........................... 459
MOPAR PARTS...
................................................ 459
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 459
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ...
....................................459
In Canada...................................................459
PU
BLICATION ORDER FORMS ...
..................... 460
background
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
man
euvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, partic
-
ularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
dri
ving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of
your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle’s warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in
the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All information contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims towards a
constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or
commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians, genuine MOPAR® parts, and
car
es about your satisfaction.
background
INTRODUCTION 9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents at the front of this
Owner’s Manual to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on
the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's
Man
ual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your
vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has
a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is
capable of performing better in a wide variety of
off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control it may roll over while
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,
or
other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts
p
ro
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury.
In fact, the US government notes that the universal
use of existing seat belts could cut the highway
death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could
reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Always buckle up.
CAMPERS
This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in
camper applications.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result in
a collision, bodily injury, and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all
Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1
background
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uco
nnect touchscreen, press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guid
e Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
w
hi
le the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
the features while the vehicle is in motion, the
system will display: “Feature not available while
the vehicle is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
wil
l be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access
Favorites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
TIP:
Topics can be added to your “Favorites” for easy
acc
ess in the future. Refer to “Multimedia” for
more information.
KEYS
Key Fob
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ign
ition system consists of a key fob with
Keyless Enter-N-Go and a START/STOP push
button ignition system. The Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) system consists of a key fob with a
mechanical key and Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
if
it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doo
rs and tailgate from distances up to approx-
imately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
t
o
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE:
With the ignition in ON/RUN position and with
the
vehicle doors open, the lock button will be
disabled, and only the unlock button will be
enabled. All RKE commands will be disabled
once the vehicle begins moving at 2
mph
(4 k
m/h) or above.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the key fob unlock button
once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice to
unlock all the doors and tailgate. This setting is
adjustable through the Uconnect Settings.
When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal
lights will flash twice.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release button only
with the key fob facing away from your body,
especially your eyes and objects that may be
damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key
fob may be damaged if the key fob is
subjected to strong electrical shocks. In order
to ensure complete efficiency of the
electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid
exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
2
background
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unl
ock the doors, tailgate, glove compartment,
storage compartments (if equipped), and rear
seatbacks.
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash, and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock
signal. The turn signal flash and horn chirp
when locking the doors can be turned on/off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are
in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm system. Opening a door with the
V
eh
icle Security Alarm system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock
button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push
the panic button on the key fob. When the Panic
Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unl
ess you turn it off by either pushing the panic
button a second time or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 2
mph (4 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the
exterior lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m)
fro m the vehicle when using the key fob to
turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio
frequency noises emitted by the system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
ind
icated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster,
and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a
button push.
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2
450.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
app
ly. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
1. R
emove the back cover of the key fob by
in
serting a flat-blade screw driver into the
slot on the bottom of the fob. Apply light
pressure until the cover unsnaps being
careful not to damage the seal. Proceed
counter-clockwise (in the order shown
below) to loosen the remaining snaps until
the battery cover can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery
removal slot and sliding the battery forward
and upward being careful not to damage
the electronic board underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob,
ma
king sure the positive (+) side is facing
up. Slide the battery until it is seated
securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it
is
properly aligned before snapping it back
in place.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
c
an
not be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
veh
icle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
aut
horized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
2
background
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a START/STOP
ignition button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
ope
rating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the
push of the START/STOP ignition button, the
key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of
the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
foll
owing modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. automatic
locking, alarm, etc.) are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
(Continued)
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Ope
rating" for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the message will display “Ignition
Or Accessory On” in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the
OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
and remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
background
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Depleted Key Fob Battery
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
b
y
a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
In this situation, a back up method can be used
to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the
vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328
ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the
C
lim
ate Control System, heated seats (if
equipped), and heated steering wheel (if
equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
Refer to “Seats” and “Steering Wheel” in this
chapter for further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an
automatic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
How To Use Remote Start
Push the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key
is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the key after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
bef
ore the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction indicator light not illuminated
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
pla
ced in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors and tailgate will lock, the turn
signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp
twice (if “Sound Horn With Remote Start” is
selected within Uconnect Settings). Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15
minute cycle.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children.
Operation of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls could
cause serious injury or death.
2
background
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob
. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15
minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
w
il
l disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
rel ease the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15
minute cycle, press the brake pedal and
pus
h and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Ent
er-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate
Controls may activate the heated seats (if
equipped) and heated steering wheel (if
equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ign
ition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
pos
ition, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
nor
mal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
veh
icle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
2
background
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
veh
icle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
aut
horized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
Sys
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the
alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended to prevent theft and/or
damage.
Always remember to cycle the ignition to
OFF to prevent battery drainage.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in
the OFF position. Refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lo
ck the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone.
Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NO
TE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
loc
k the doors using the manual door lock.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock door handle
(if equipped). Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to
pro
tect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the
bat
tery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5
seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the
removable door panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
2
background
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior
rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when
leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever
forward to the lock position and close the door.
To unlock the door, push the rocker lever
rearward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
u
nl
ock the door cylinders, tailgate, glove
compartment, and storage compartments (if
equipped).
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each
front door panel. Push the switch forward to
unlock the doors, and rearward to lock the
doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always place the
ignition in the OFF position and remove the
key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
1 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) and tailgate without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off;
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates Headlight
Illumination On Approach (low beams,
license plate lamp, parking lights) for
whichever time duration is set within the
Uconnect Settings between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also
initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(
1.
5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
fro
nt driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed,
a
ll
doors will unlock when you grab a hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(
1.
5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
When exiting the vehicle, always place the
ignition in the OFF position and remove the
key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
background
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
front passenger door handle to unlock all doors
and the tailgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
d
oo
r handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
loc
king a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function only if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Pas
sive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry
vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
ope
n doors are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key
fob inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock
and alert the customer. If Passive Entry is
disabled using the Uconnect system, the key
protection described in this section remains
active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
FOB
IK-Safe operation when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft
(1.
5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob
wit
hin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
fro
nt door handles, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button will lock the vehicle doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
When pushing the door handle lock button, DO
NOT
grab the door handle. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the
lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, the
driver must wait three seconds before
locking or unlocking the doors, using any
Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow the driver to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect System, the key protection
described in “Preventing Inadvertent Locking
Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle” remains
active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
2
background
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The Automatic Door Lock feature default
condition is enabled. When enabled, the door
locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's
speed exceeds 15
mph (24 km/h). The
Aut
omatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door,
tem
porarily remove the sealing plug for access,
and use a flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical
key) to rotate the dial to the lock or unlock
position.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle, even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging or disengaging the
Child-Protection Door Lock system, always
test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock lever rearward (located on the
door trim panel), roll down the window and
open the door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
Aft
er engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged
(locked).
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
Front Door Removal
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
When front doors are removed, the message
“Bl
ind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will
display in the instrument cluster display. Power
Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also be
unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
da
mage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper
an
d lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
hea
d driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the
F
as
tener Bin located under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by
required due to the weight of the door to
avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened
during door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb
/ 8
N·m). Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“St
arting And Operating” for further
information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage
to the vehicle’s parts will occur.
2
background
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
under the instrument panel by sliding the
plastic panel along the door frame toward
the seats until the tabs are detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic
cov
er.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the
wi
ring harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
un der the wiring harness, and lift the
harness lever into the open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull down-
wa
rd on the wiring connector to unplug.
Unh
ook the wire harness strap from the
hook on the bodyside door opening. Store
the wiring connector in the lower door
basket of the door.
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiring Harness Lever
1 — Wiring Harness Lever
2 — Black Security Tab
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
7. With the door in the open position, remove
the check bolt from the door check attach-
ment on the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx
h
ea
d driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
e
as
ier re-installation.
Door Check
8. With the door open, lift the door with the
he
lp of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
ste
ps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
u
se
d to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling. When reinstalling the door
check arm attachment bolt, bolt torque should
be between 11.76
ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9 ft·lb /
38 N
·m.
Rear Door Removal
Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by
required due to the weight of the door to
avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m).
Ref
er to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage
to the vehicle’s parts will occur.
2
background
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
da
mage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from the upper
an
d lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
hea
d driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the
F
as
tener Bin under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4.
Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
ac
cess door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NO
TE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring
h
ar
ness. This will unlock the connector tab,
allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged.
Unhook the wire harness strap from the hook on
the bodyside door opening. Store the wire
connector into the lower basket of the door.
Wiring Connector
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
6. With the door in the open position, remove
the check bolt from the door check attach-
ment on the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx
h
ea
d driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
e
as
ier reinstallation.
Door Check
7. With the door open, lift the door with the
he
lp of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
ste
ps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
u
se
d to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling. When reinstalling the check
arm attachment bolt, bolt torque should be
between 11.76
ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9 ft·lb /
38 N
·m.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m).
Ref
er to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage
to the vehicle’s parts will occur.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
background
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion
and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or
lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located
on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the handle to raise the seat, push downward on
the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired
position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Front Seatback Recline
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and
lean forward or rearward, depending on the
direction you would like the seatback to move.
Release the strap when the desired position is
reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Recline Strap
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
(Continued)
Lumbar Support
The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on
the outboard side of the front driver seat.
Rotate the control forward to increase and
rearward to decrease the desired amount of
lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Knob
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The Heated Seat Control Buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
Heated Seat Control Buttons
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
t
he
driver’s seat can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uco
nnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or
other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
2
background
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be
folded flat to access the storage area behind
the seat. The seat bottom can also be lifted into
the Stadium Position to create more storage
space on the rear floor, and provide access to
the underseat storage bins (if equipped). Refer
to “Rear Seat Stadium Position” in this section
for more information.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
The center head restraints must be in the
lowest position to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat.
Folding The Rear Seats
To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap
located on the upper outboard side of the rear
seat to release the seat. The head restraints are
folded independently. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in this chapter for further
information.
NOTE:
Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright
pos
ition using the vehicle key. Each seatback
must be unlocked to release for folding.
Release Strap Locations
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Seatback is not intended to be used for
storing cargo when folded flat. Seatback only
folds to allow access to the cargo area behind
the seat. Vehicle should not be operated with
unsecured cargo on the second row folded
seatback.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Rear Seat Folded Flat
To raise the seatback to the proper position,
man
ually lift the seatback until it locks into
place. To return the head restraint to the proper
position, manually lift up until it locks into place.
If interference from the cargo area behind the
seat prevents the seatback from fully locking,
you will have difficulty returning the seats to
their proper position.
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with stow clips
located on the lower trim, next to the rear
seats. Use these clips to hold the seat belt
out of the path of the seat back when it is
being folded and raised.
Stow Clip Location
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal. By simply opening the
seats to the open position, the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape over time.
Rear Seat Stadium Position
The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward
into the Stadium Position to create more
storage space on the vehicle’s floor, and to
access the under seat storage bins (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. Perform a “push - pull -
push” check to confirm the seat is fully
locked. If the seatback is not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. A red indicator on the pull strap
will be displayed if the seatback is not
securely locked. An improperly latched seat
could cause serious injury.
2
background
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:
1. Lift upward on each section of the seat
bo
ttom.
Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)
2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the
St
adium Position.
Stadium Position
To return the seat bottom to the normal
pos
ition, push downward on the raised seat
bottom.
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To
unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head
restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for
clea
ning.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head
restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can
go, then push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust
it to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
deg
rees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable,
but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well
as an adjustable, removable center head
restraint.
To fold down the outboard head restraints, push
the
button located on the outboard side of the
head restraint.
Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
background
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To return the head restraint to its upward
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the
hea
d restraint. To lower the center head
restraint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far
as it can go. Then, push the adjustment
button and the release button at the base of
each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
res
traint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height using the adjustment button. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
information on child seat tether routing.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
wit
h the center console when folding the seat
down.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
The Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column feature
allows the steering column to tilt upward or
downward, and lengthen or shorten the steering
column. The Tilt/Telescoping lever is located on
the steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the Tilt/
T
el
escoping lever downward (toward the floor).
To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while
passengers are occupying the rear seat. In
a collision, people riding in this area without
the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To lock the steering column in position, pull the
Tilt/Telescoping lever upward until fully
engaged.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that will warm the steering wheel in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated
steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
loc
ated on the center of the instrument panel
below the touchscreen and within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
ste
ering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the
heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uco
nnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or
other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater.
It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
background
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The Inside Day/Night Mirror can be adjusted up,
down, left, and right for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from other vehicles can be
red
uced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The Automatic Dimming Mirror can be adjusted
up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight
gla
re from other vehicles.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
w
he
n the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature defaults to on
at
every ignition cycle, and can be turned on or
off through the Uconnect “Controls” button on
the touchscreen.
Outside Mirrors
The Outside Mirrors are located on the front
driver and passenger side doors, and are
adjusted manually or by power adjustment (if
equipped).
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside
Mir
ror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The Power Mirror controls are located on the
door panel next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Control Switch
The Power Mirror controls consist of mirror
sele ct buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
Using the Power Mirror Control Switch, push any
of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/
RUN
position to adjust the power mirrors.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
The Heated Mirrors feature helps to
melt frost or ice. This feature will be
act
ivated whenever the rear window
defroster (if equipped) is activated. Refer to
“Climate Controls” in this chapter for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
The Illuminated Vanity Mirrors are located on
the sun visors. To use the mirrors, rotate the
sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
upward.
Vanity Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side mirror could
cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side mirror.
2
background
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,
interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
fir
st detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light, and instrument panel light
operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a
dedicated position below the headlight
assembly. DRLs are active when the low beams
are not on while the vehicle’s transmission is in
any position (Automatic Transmission), or when
the vehicle begins to move (Manual
Transmission).
NOTE:
The DRLs, on the same side of the vehicle as
the
active turn signal, will turn off automatically
when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
High/Low Beam Switch
The High/Low Beam Switch is located within the
Multifunction Lever on the left side of the
steering wheel. High beam headlights can be
used for improved visibility in low lit areas when
there is no oncoming traffic. Otherwise, it is
recommended to use the low beam headlights
to reduce glare to other vehicles.
With the headlight switch activated, push the
Mul
tifunction Lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
The lever will return to the centered position. To
return the headlights to low beam, pull the lever
toward the steering wheel, or push the lever
toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the
high beam headlights temporarily to signal
another vehicle of a passing occurrence. Pull
and hold the Multifunction Lever to activate the
Flash-To-Pass feature. When the lever is
released, the Flash-To-Pass feature will
deactivate.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
The Automatic Headlight System will turn the
headlights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds (programmable through
the Uconnect settings) after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for
further information on the headlight delay
timing.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of
the vehicle below the headlights. When
activated, these lights add illumination directed
at the driving surface to aid in poor visibility
conditions.
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the
par
king lights or low beam headlights and push
the fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
the
re is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
l
ig
ht when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
The Lane Change Assist feature will flash the
turn signal (left or right) three times to indicate
to other drivers that you are changing lanes. Tap
the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
The Lights-On Reminder feature will identify if
the headlights or parking lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. A
chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened reminding the operator to turn the
headlight switch off.
Bed Lights — If Equipped
The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo
area. Bed lights are turned on by pushing the
bed light switch located on the lower half of the
headlight switch.
Bed Light Switch
2
background
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster
display when these lights are on. Pushing the
switch a second time will turn the lights off.
The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60
sec
onds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when
the front doors are opened, by rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control (dial on the
right) on the headlight switch fully upward while
the doors are closed, or if equipped, when the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the
cen
ter of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of
one large center light and four smaller reading
lights. Each reading light can be turned on by
pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Interior Courtesy Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on,
rotating the instrument panel dimmer
control to the extreme bottom position will
cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as “Party” mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the
right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
ambient light levels below the instrument panel,
near the floor.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column;
it operates the multiple wiper options. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Front Wiper Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable.
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1
to 18 seconds.
Intermittent Wiper Control
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
I
f
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16
km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold until desired spray is reached. If the lever
is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will
start and continue to operate for two or three
wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, the
intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wip
ers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
Then, the wipers will turn off.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
2
background
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held
up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pum
p; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Mist Control
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
The Manual Climate Controls System is an air
conditioning and heating system designed to
make the vehicle comfortable in all types of
weather.
Manual Climate Controls
Specific instructions on how to adjust the heat
a
nd
air conditioning settings are detailed in the
following Manual Climate Control Descriptions
chart.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button — If Equipped
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving
t
he
temperature control knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Rec
irculation indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equ
ipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15
minutes.
2
background
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heater Only
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as
you
turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases the heating temperature and turning the temperature control
kno
b counterclockwise decreases the heating temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The
blower speeds increase as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from
the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air
. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
sid
e window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
f
lo
or outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
con
ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
out
lets. When the Defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the blower control knob to the O (off) position.
Icon Description
2
background
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
The Automatic Climate Control system is designed to make the vehicle feel comfortable in all types of weather. The Automatic Climate Controls system
allows you to adjust heat and air conditioning settings by pressing buttons on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
Specific instructions on how to adjust the heat and air conditioning settings are detailed in the following Automatic Climate Control Descriptions chart.
2
background
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
r
ec
irculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Faceplate AUTO Button
Touchscreen AUTO
But
ton
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically
adj
usting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic
mode.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
t
he
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
t
he
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15
minutes.
Icon Description
2
background
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
tou
chscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
o
n.
SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
But
tons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Icon Description
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen or press the Mode button on the faceplate to adjust the airflow
dis
tribution. The airflow distribution can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
a
ir
. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
sid
e window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
f
lo
or outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2
background
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
c
on
ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Faceplate OFF Button
Touchscreen OFF
But
ton
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/
OFF.
Icon Description
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy,
press the A/C button to turn off the air
conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If A/C performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator),
for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean
with a gentle water spray from the front of the
radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
per
formance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and
the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can
be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on
t
he
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equ
ipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
li
ke the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto
-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. W
hen the system is set up for your comfort
le
vel, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
2
background
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Aut
omatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
sug
gested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air, with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control System filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power windows feature allows for
movement of the windows with the push of a
button. The power window switches are located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls. Push the switch downward to open the
window and pull upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window
and
the top right switch controls the right front
window. The bottom left switch controls the left
rear window and the bottom right switch
controls the right rear window.
Power Window Switches
WEATHER
CONTROL
SET
TINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to ,
on, and
blower on high. Roll
dow
n the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clea
r.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
t
o
the position. If
windshield fogging
sta
rts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Window Switches
2 — Driver And Passenger Rear Window Switches
3 — Window Lockout Switch
2
background
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
There are window switches located on the
rear of the center console for the rear
passenger windows.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
front passenger door power window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
down, past the detent, and release and the
window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
swi
tch down briefly, without going past the
detent, and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
dur
ing the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
To open the rear sliding window, push the
release button inward while sliding the window
into the open position.
Release Button Location
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized by adjusting the window opening.
DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the
soft top system will be provided in a separate
box located in the bed of the vehicle for shipping
purposes only.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used
ind
ependently. Your vehicle warranty will not
cover damage resulting from both tops being
installed at the same time.
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
you
r vehicle located in the center console. This
kit includes the necessary tools required for the
operations described in the following sections.
All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
Provided Tools
Removing The Hard Top
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front
Panel(s) Removal” in “Freedom Top
Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — If
Equipped” for removal instructions.
2. Open both doors.
3.
Using the provided #T50 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, remove the Torx head fastener
that secures the hard top at the B-pillar
(near the top of the front door) on each side.
Torx Head Fastener Location — Left Side Shown
4. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft
tr
im panel attached by the hook-and-loop
fastener.
Interior Soft Trim Panel (If Equipped)
5. R
emove the two Torx head fasteners, one
on
each side, that secure the hard top to the
vehicle (along the interior bodyside rear
-
ward of the back doors) using the #T50 Torx
hea
d driver.
1 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
2 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
3 — 15 mm Socket
4 — Ratchet
2
background
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. Remove the four Torx head fasteners that
secure the hard top to the back of the
vehicle cab using the #T50
Torx head
dri
ver.
Torx Head Fastener Locations
7. Locate the wire harness on the left rear
in
side corner of the vehicle. To access the
harness, remove the plastic cover by
pushing on the side of the cover and sliding
it off.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic
cov
er.
Step Seven
8. To release the wire harness, pull back on
th
e red latch, then push down on the black
button while pulling the harness out.
Pull Back On Red Latch
Push Black Button To Release
9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
In
stall edge protectors and place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle's interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle's interior.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Installing The Hard Top
NOTE:
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usa
ge, they must be removed prior to installa-
tion of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in
t
hi
s section for removal procedures.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
re
place if necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for
re
moval in reverse order.
NOTE:
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:
Be sure the panel is centered so that
there is an even gap on both sides.
Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop
fasteners to ensure they are properly
secured.
3. Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush
wi
th the body at the sides and across the
back.
NOTE:
The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard
top
to the body should be torqued to 155 in-lb
+/-
22 in-lb (17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the
pro
vided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet.
Installing The Soft Top
NOTE:
The following procedures are for first time set
up only. For future soft top procedures, refer
to “Soft Top — If Equipped” in this section.
A visual instruction sheet is also included
with the vehicle that details the procedure
below.
The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof
racks, spare tires, building materials,
hunting or camping supplies, etc. For
optional Mopar accessory roof racks, refer
to “Roof Luggage Rack” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle.”
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame and bodyside, or fully removed.
The removal of the hard top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the hard
top.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to
the retainers will occur.
2
background
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Locate and remove the following items
prior to hard top removal:
Right and left side door frames
Rear belt rail
Eight door frame attachment Torx head
fasteners
Right and left side quarter panel cover
assemblies
Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Removing
Th
e Hard Top” in this section.
3. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle.
Se
cure the belt rail using the six fasteners
with the provided #T50
Torx head driver
and
ratchet. Refer to the table below for
recommended torque specifications.
Belt Rail Fasteners
4. R
emove the storage cover on the quarter
tr
im. Use the emergency key blade to pry
the cover open.
Pry Open Storage Cover
5. T
uck the wire harness inside the storage
co
mpartment.
Correct Placement Of Wire Harness
Torque
Spe
cification
For Torx
Fastener
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to
the retainers will occur.
1 — Rear Fasteners
2 — Corner Fasteners
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE:
Ensure the wire harness is not tucked under the
bel
t rail or between the belt rail and the door
rail.
Incorrect Placement Of Wire Harness
6. I
nstall the door frames. Start with both front
do
ors, followed by both rear doors. Refer to
“Door Frame Installation” in this section for
instructions and appropriate torque specifi
-
cations for the door frame Torx head
fas
teners.
7. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This
ba
g should be discarded. It was intended as
a protective cover for shipping only.
8. Ensure the top is secured with the provided
ho
ok-and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft
top onto the rear of the cab. Line up the
locater pins (one on each side of the soft
top) with the rear door frames.
9. Using the provided #T50 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, install and tighten the Torx
fasteners by turning them clockwise.
Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten. Refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications.
Repeat on the opposite side.
Step Seven
Soft Top In Place
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the soft top or vehicle.
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can
strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.
2
background
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the
Sunrider® position, ensure the top is
secured with the provided hook-and-loop
fasteners. For instructions on how to raise
the soft top, refer to “Raising The Soft Top”
in this section.
Secured Top In Sunrider® Position
Removing The Soft Top
1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Lowering
The Soft Top” in this section.
2. Using the provided #T50 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head
fasteners on the inside of each top mecha
-
nism.
Step Two
3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and
aw
ay from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
vehicle’s sport bar and trim. Store the soft
top in a safe, clean, and dry location.
4. Remove the door frames. The rear door
fr
ames must be removed before the front
door frames. Refer to “Door Frame
Removal” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for removal instructions.
5. Using the provided #T50 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head
fasteners on both rear corners and the back
of the cab, then remove the belt rail.
NOTE:
Folding down the rear seats is recommended to
pro
vide easier access to the fasteners.
Belt Rail Fasteners
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the soft top or vehicle.
1 — Rear Fasteners
2 — Corner Fasteners
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE:
The left side panel must be removed before
rem
oving the right side panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor against the wind-
sh
ield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left
si
de panel (one at the front, the rear, and
outside), unlocking them from the roof.
Roof Panel Lock Locations
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch
lo
cated at the top of the windshield.
Header Panel Latch Locations
4. Remove the left side panel.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof
racks, spare tires, building materials,
hunting or camping supplies, etc. For
information on optional Mopar accessory
roof racks, refer to “Roof Luggage Rack” in
this section.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the front
header, sport bar, and body side, or fully
removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
int
erior water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door, or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle’s interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
1 — Header Panel Latches
2 — Unlatched Position
2
background
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right
side panel.
Freedom Top Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular
Hard Top come with a Freedom Top storage bag
that allows you to store your Freedom Top
panels. The storage bag contains two
compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down
so
the loops and hooks are facing upward.
Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the
Freedom Top bag.
There is a pouch located on the front of the
bag to store the hard top edge protector that
is used when the hard top is not installed on
the vehicle.
1. Insert the left side Freedom Top panel into
th
e bag with the latches facing upward.
Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
di
vider is laying flat).
Fold Divider Over Left Panel
3. I
nsert the right side Freedom Top panel into
th
e bag with the latches facing downward.
Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is
c
los
ed prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom
Top bag closed.
Storage Bag Closed
5. Store the Freedom Top bag in a safe loca-
ti
on.
Front Panel(s) Installation
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front
receiver mounting hole, followed by the left
side panel, making sure there is no over
-
hang. Make sure that the panels are sitting
flu
sh with the body.
2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps
fo
r removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and Freedom
T
op
Panels should be clear of any dust and
debris prior to reinstallation.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front
Panel(s) Removal” in this section.
2. Open both front doors.
3.
Using the provided #T50 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, remove the two Torx head
fasteners that secure the hard top at the
B-pillar (near the top of the front doors) on
each side.
Torx Head Fastener Location — Left Side Shown
4. If equipped, remove the rear lower interior
so
ft trim panel attached by a hook-and-loop
fastener.
Interior Soft Trim Panel (If Equipped)
5. R
emove the two Torx head fasteners that
se
cure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
interior bodyside rearward of the back
doors) using the #T50
Torx head driver.
2
background
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the four Torx head fasteners that
secure the hard top to the back of the
vehicle cab using the #T50
Torx head
dri
ver.
Torx Head Fastener Locations
7. Locate the wire harness on the left rear
in
side corner of the vehicle. To access the
harness, remove the plastic cover by
pushing on the side of the cover and sliding
it off.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic
cov
er.
Step Seven
8. To release the wire harness, pull back on
th
e red latch, then push down on the black
button while pulling the harness out.
Pull Back On Red Latch
Push Black Button To Release
9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
In
stall the edge protectors and place the
hard top on a soft surface to prevent
damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the hard top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the hard
top.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE:
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usa
ge, they must be removed prior to installa-
tion of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in
t
hi
s section for removal procedures.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
re
place if necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for
re
moval in reverse order.
NOTE:
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:
Be sure the panel is centered so that
there is an even gap on both sides.
Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop
fasteners to ensure they are properly
secured.
3. Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush
wi
th the body at the sides and across the
back.
NOTE:
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the
body should be torqued to 155 in-lb +/-
22 i
n-lb (17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the
pro
vided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet.
DOOR FRAME
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to
the retainers will occur.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable door frame(s) may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle's interior.
2
background
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door Frame Removal
NOTE:
The rear door frames must be removed first,
foll
owed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #T40 T
orx head driver
and ratchet, loosen the Torx head
fasteners located on the underside of each
door hinge (two per door).
Door Frame Torx Head Fastener Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the Torx
he
ad fasteners by pulling downward.
NOTE:
The fasteners will not fall out once completely
l
oo
se, as they are held in place by an internal
mechanism.
Remove Fasteners From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
ve
hicle.
Step Three
4. Store the fasteners in a secure location.
5.
Repeat the procedure on the front door
fr
ame.
Door Frame Installation
NOTE:
The door frames (if equipped with a soft top)
can
be installed when the doors are attached or
removed.
1. Install the front door frame first.
2.
Ensure the windshield is in the “up” posi-
ti
on. Carefully place the front door frame in
the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield,
and line up the holes for the Torx head
fasteners (two for each door).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the door and/or door frame(s) removed as
you will lose the protection that they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the door frame, and insert the fasteners
from underneath. Tighten with the
#T40
Torx head driver until they are snug,
bei
ng careful not to cross-thread the
fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the
following table for the appropriate torque
specifications for the door frame fasteners.
Tighten Fasteners
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on
to
p of the body side, just behind the rear
door opening.
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
on
to the rear belt rail and the rear of the
front door frame, making sure the rubber
seals lay flat. Ensure the seals are installed
correctly to avoid water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Belt Rail
Position Of Rear Frame On Front Frame
6. Insert the fasteners from underneath.
Ti
ghten with the #T40 Torx head driver until
the
y are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten.
Refer to the previous table for the appro
-
priate torque specifications for the door
fra
me fasteners.
Torque
Spe
cification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
8.8 in-lbs 11.0 in-lbs 6.6 in-lbs
12 N·m 15 N·m 5 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can
strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.
2
background
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or
acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on
the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or
side curtains.
WARNING!
The fabric quarter panel cover assemblies,
rear window, and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do
not rely on them to contain occupants
within the vehicle or to protect against
injury during an accident. Remember,
always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of
all pinch points when installing and
removing the soft top. The side bows may
cause serious injury if fingers or hands get
caught in-between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
tires, building, hunting or camping supplies,
and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed
as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional
loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic
car wash. Window scratches and wax build up
may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may
result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top
Models” in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information. It
contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry
or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers
securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the
soft top framework when opening or closing.
Damage to the top may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
int
erior water damage, stains, or mildew on the
top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top
may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — Rear Window Vertical Retainer
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Quarter Panel Upper Hook And Loop
5 — #5 Bow
2
background
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window View And Components
1 — Top Retainer 4 — Pull Tabs
2 — Right Vertical Retainer 5 — Lower Center Retainer
3 — Lower Retainers 6 — Left Vertical Retainer
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider®
Position:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
wi
ndshield.
2. Release the header latches from the
cr
ossbar by pulling the handle downward.
Make sure the hook is fully disengaged from
its receiver.
Step Two
3. F
rom both the left and right sides, lift up on
th
e #1 Bow of the soft top to begin the oper-
ation. It is best to utilize two people for this
p
ro
cedure.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
si
de link to fold the soft top rearward.
Fold Soft Top Rearward
5. Secure the top in this position by using the
tw
o hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the
center console.
Secured Top In Sunrider® Position
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® Posi-
tion with the rear window and quarter panel
a
ss
emblies fully installed or completely
removed.
CAUTION!
Quarter windows and rear window must be
either all in or all out.
2
background
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove The Rear Window And Quarter Panel
Assemblies
1. Start by removing the rear window first.
Us
e the two straps located on the bottom
of each side of the rear window to remove
the right and left vertical retainers, as well
as the lower center retainer.
Step One (Right Side Shown)
Remove Lower Center Retainer
2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it
ou
tward in either direction until it is
completely separate from its retainer. Do
not pull downward while removing the rear
window. Damage to the retainer could
result. Store the rear window in the soft top
rear window storage bag (if equipped), or in
a safe location. Refer to “Soft Top Rear
Window Storage Bag — If Equipped” in this
section for further information.
Remove Rear Window
3. Move to one of the quarter panel covers
as
semblies. Starting with either side, start
to disengage the quarter panel cover
assembly from the bottom by pulling the
fabric at the bottom upward.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
4. With two hands, grasp the front of the quarter
panel cover assembly and pull outward to
disengage it from its retainer on the door
frame.
Step Two
5. P
ull the quarter panel cover assembly up
an
d out from the bottom, then pull it down
and away from the vehicle to remove.
Step Three
6. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter
pa
nel cover assembly. Store the quarter
panels in the soft top rear window storage
bag (if equipped), or a safe location.
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag — If
Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window,
proceed as follows:
1. With the bag opened completely, fold the
fa
bric divider downward and lay the rear
window in the bottom of the bag.
Step One
2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear
wi
ndow.
Step Two
2
background
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly
all the way to the right side and the second
quarter panel cover assembly on the left
side. Secure both using the two
hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.
NOTE:
The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked
“
1”
and “2” on the inside of the panel assembly.
Step Three
4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
lo
cation.
Step Four
Raising The Soft Top
1. From the Sunrider® Position, remove
straps if previously secured.
Securing Strap
2. U
sing the side link, lift and push the soft top
to
ward the front of the vehicle, manually
guiding the top into the closed position.
Fold Soft Top Toward Front Of Vehicle
1 — Right Quarter Panel Assembly
2 — Left Quarter Panel Assembly
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the soft top or vehicle.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lower Top Into Closed Position
3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on
th
e header latch downward to engage the
hook into its receiver.
Step Three
4. P
ull the handle back upward while
sq
ueezing the hook, locking the latch into
place.
Step Four
5. Repeat steps three and four on the
ot
her side.
If the rear window and quarter panel cover
a
ss
emblies were previously removed, proceed
as follows to install:
1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover
as
sembly up into the retainer.
Step One
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install
steps could result in damage to the Soft Top
or vehicle.
2
background
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of
the cover assembly (toward the front of the
vehicle) starting at the top, and working
downward.
Step Two
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
bef
ore the vehicle resumes motion.
3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
up
per front corner of each quarter panel
cover by pressing firmly.
Quarter Panel Hook-And-Loop Fastener
Install The Rear Window
1. From either side, guide the rear window
in
to the retainer while keeping the window
level.
Step One
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the
rear window beginning on the left side of the
vehicle and working toward the center.
Then, move to the right side of the vehicle
and continue from the center, working to
the right until the rear window is secured in
the lower retainer.
Step Two
3. Engage the vertical retainers up the right
an d left side of the rear window.
Engage Vertical Retainers (Left Side Shown)
4. Tuck the rear window under the soft top
fa
bric and press firmly.
Tuck Rear Window Under Soft Top Fabric
5. Engage the rear window retainers in the
lo
wer right and left corners.
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer
to
“Removing The Soft Top” in “Dual Top — If
Equipped” in this chapter.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a
structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield
also provides some protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and
other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
win
dshield down, as you lose the protection this
structural element can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the
win
dshield can be folded down. However, the
protection afforded by the windshield is then
lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly
and cautiously. It is recommended that the
CAUTION!
Quarter windows and rear window must be
either all in or all out.
2
background
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph
(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if
you
are driving off-road with the windshield
folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
req
uired its removal is completed and before
you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passengers should wear seat belts at all times,
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the
windshield is raised or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
doo
rs. If you choose to remove the doors, see
an authorized dealer for a replacement
cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road
use.
Lowering The Windshield
1. Before completing the steps below:
If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top,
the top MUST be lowered, and the door
frames must be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard
top, the Freedom Panels MUST be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
Refer to the “Soft Top,” “Door Frame,”
and “Freedom Top” instructions in this
chapter for more information.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over
th
e windshield wiper hex bolts.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
3. Using the provided 15 m
m socket, remove
the two hex bolts and remove the wiper
arms.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help
protect against personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the
windshield is securely fastened, either up
or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
worn at all times when the windshield is
down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the
instructions for raising the windshield.
Make sure that the folding windshield,
windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are
correctly and tightly assembled before
driving your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions may prevent your vehicle from
providing you and your passengers’
protection in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage
to the vehicle’s header seal.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower
both sun visors.
5. Using the provided #T40 T
orx head driver,
rem ove the four Torx head fasteners
located along the interior of the windshield
(two on each side of the header trim).
Interior Torx Head Fastener Locations
(Le
ft Side Shown)
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
t
hr
eaded holes and tighten for safekeeping, or
in the fastener bin located below the rear seat.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts
th
e footman loop bumpers (if equipped).
Footman Loop Bumpers
7. S
ecure the windshield by passing a cinch
st
rap through the footman loops on either
side of the hood and on the windshield
frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind
-
shield in place.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective
cover that is to be used whenever the
windshield is folded down in order to protect the
ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover, follow the
instructions below:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
hi
nges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that
it
covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
pr
operly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning
the
windshield to the normal position. Store the
cover in the cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt
c
an
accumulate in the cover and block the
camera lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the
camera lens, module, and inside cover, being
careful not to damage or scratch the module.
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Footman Loop
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the
windshield could result.
2
background
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Raising The Windshield
1. Release the strap that secured the wind-
shield in the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3.
Using the provided #T40 T
orx head driver,
rei nstall the four Torx head fasteners
located along the interior of the windshield
(two on each side of the header trim).
Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten.
Interior Torx Head Fastener Locations (Left Side
Sho
wn)
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using
th
e provided 15 mm socket. First, align the
tip
s of the blade to the “T” mark in the glass.
Then, while holding the arm in that position,
reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug.
Be careful not to overtighten. Repeat for the
other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper
ar
m hex bolts and push gently until they
snap into place.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
6. A
fter completing the steps above:
If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top,
reinstall the door frames and raise the
top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard
top, reinstall the Freedom Panels.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
l
o
c
ated in the middle of the hood opening. Push
the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle to
open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Remove support rod from the hood, and
insert into the radiator crossmember.
Closing The Hood
To close the hood, remove the support rod from
the radiator crossmember, and install into the
clip on the hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
both of the hood latches.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
TAILGATE
Opening
Tailgate Release Handle
To open the tailgate, pull the release handle
loc
ated on the center of the tailgate and guide
it to the lowered position.
The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower,
mor
e controlled lowering.
Three-Position Tailgate
The vehicle’s tailgate can be set to three
positions: open, mid, or closed. The mid
position can be used to provide a loading
surface for transporting sheet goods.
To use the mid position, open the tailgate and
low
er it to near mid position.
Tailgate In Mid Position
Secure the tailgate in this position by looping
the
tailgate straps behind the circular retainer
on both sides.
Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer
Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated
b
eh
ind the circular retainer against the sides of
the sheet metal.
Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
2
background
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap
When hauling cargo using the mid position
and the tailgate, you must support the load at
two forward locations:
At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1)
Between the wheelhouse and the
tailgate (2)
Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box
NOTE:
Failure to support the load at these two forward
l
oc
ations could result in damage.
Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide
support at locations (1) and (2). Each board
will need to be cut to fit inside the pickup box.
The support at location (1) should be seated
in the dedicated formation on top of the
wheelhouses.
The support at location (2) should use the
remaining two 2x4s. Stack the boards and
place them into the formation in the side wall
of the pickup box. The corners of the bottom
board will need to be chamfered to fit.
NOTE:
All cargo transported in the pickup box
must be secured.
The maximum payload for the mid posi-
tion is 500 lbs (226 kg).
Closing
To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides
latch into place.
1 — Support Location 1
2 — Support Location 2
CAUTION!
After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly
to ensure it is securely latched. Damage to
the vehicle or cargo could occur.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE:
If the tonneau cover is installed, make sure
the tonneau cover is fully closed before
closing the tailgate.
Due to the presence of the Center
High-Mounted Stop Light, removal of the
tailgate is not recommended.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) — IF
EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12V battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sun
vis
or or the overhead console, designate the
three different HomeLink® channels. The
HomeLink® indicator is located above the
center button.
HomeLink® Buttons
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of
the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
tra
nsmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/
RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require
assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
Programming garage door openers that were
manufactured after 1995 can be identified by
the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage
door opener.
2
background
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
ope
n and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 i
nches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
k
ee
ping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
wa
nt to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
th
e indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
H
om
eLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
ga
rage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. On some garage door openers/
devices there may be a light that blinks
when the garage door opener/device is in
the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
nex
t step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
pr
ogrammed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device acti
-
vates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
s
ec
onds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
but
tons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(
Ro
lling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
pre
viously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
bu
tton until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“P
rogramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps."
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 i
nches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
k
ee
ping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
wa
nt to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
th
e indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
H
om
eLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed
Ho
meLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(No
n-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
pre
viously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
bu
tton until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“P
rogramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
tra
nsmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cyc
ling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 i
nches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Hom
eLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
2
background
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has success
-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The
ind
icator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
ch
ange flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
Ho
meLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
rem
aining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
dev
ice for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Ca
nadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
pre
viously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
bu
tton until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“C
anadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
but
tons for 20 seconds until the orange
indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
dis
abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates
whe
n the engine is running for security reasons
associated with removable tops and doors.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
ple
ase call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
2
background
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
rel
ease handle.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the
top
latch.
Upper Console Storage Latch
To access the lower storage compartment, lift
the
bottom latch.
Lower Console Storage Latch
Under Seat Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two options
for under seat storage:
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Non-Locking Storage Wall
The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for
s
to
rage by folding the bottom of the rear seat up
and placing items behind the wall.
There is also an option to remove the wall by
rem
oving the four bolts that connect the
storage wall to the floor.
Locking Storage Bin
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin Location
If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located
b
el
ow the rear seats. It can be accessed by
folding the rear seat bottom upward into the
Stadium Position.
The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on
the
front of the bin and uses the same key as
the glove compartment and the center console
for your vehicle.
Inside the bin are three removable dividers to
set
up storage that works best for you.
The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by
unf
astening the four bolts that attach the bin to
the vehicle floor using the provided #40
Torx
hea
d driver and ratchet. The bottom of the
storage bin has rubber mats that need to be
removed to access the four bolts. These bolts
can then be stored in the fastener bin below the
rear seat.
Under Seat Storage (Open View)
1 — Key Locks
2 — Removable Bolts
3 — Handle
2
background
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your Locking Storage bin also has a front
handle that makes it easier to carry and pull out
from the floor of the vehicle when the four bolts
that attach the bin to the floor are removed.
Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)
Rear Behind Seat Storage — If Equipped
The rear wall storage bin is located behind the
right rear seat.
Rear Wall Storage Bin
Rear Wall Storage Bin
To access the storage bin, pull upward on the
pul
l strap located on the upper outboard side of
the right rear seat, and fold the seatback
forward.
NOTE:
The rear seatback can be locked using the
veh
icle key to secure items in the rear wall
storage bin. The seat lock is located on the
upper outboard side of each seatback. Both
seatbacks should be locked to limit access to
items behind seat.
Rear Wall Netting
The rear wall netting can be accessed the same
w
ay
as the rear wall storage bin.
Rear Wall Netting
Fastener Bin
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin
used to store the fasteners for the doors,
windshield, and hard top (if equipped) while not
in use. The Fastener Bin is located behind the
rear seat storage bin. The Fastener Bin contains
foam inserts for each of the fasteners; they are
removable.
1 — Rear Wall Storage Bin
2 — Pull Strap
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
To remove the Fastener Bin:
1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the
Fas
tener Bin.
2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of
th
e Fastener Bin.
NOTE:
The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener
Bin
.
Fastener Bin
Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center
console.
Front Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of
the
center console, near the floor.
Rear Cupholders
NOTE:
Cupholders located in the front center console,
as
well as the back of the center console are not
removable.
There are also cupholders located in the rear
sea
t armrest (if equipped). These cupholders
can be removed for cleaning.
Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders
Electrical Power Outlet
There is a 12V (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that
can provide power for accessories designed for
use with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of
the
instrument panel below the climate
controls, and is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
1 — Door Removal
2 — Under Seat Storage Bin Removal
3 — Hard Top Removal
4 — Folding Windshield
2
background
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Front Power Outlet
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160
W (13 A) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A)
power rating is exceeded the fuse
protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw
accessories, or long periods of the vehicle
not being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
(Continued)
Power Inverters — If Equipped
There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter
outlet located on the back of the center console
to convert Direct Current (DC) current to
Alternating Current (AC).
This outlet can power cellular phones,
ele
ctronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 W. Certain high-end
video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
There may also be a second 115 V (400 W)
max
imum exterior power inverter located on the
rear right side of the truck bed near the tailgate.
This inverter can be turned on by the Instrument
Panel Power Inverter switch located to the left
of the steering wheel. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
this limit, as will most power tools. The indicator
light on the power inverter switch will be
illuminated when the inverter is turned on.
Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)
Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not
e
a
c
h outlet. If two outlets are in use, 400 W is
shared amongst the devices plugged in.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
ove
rload protection. If the power rating of 400
W is exceeded, the power inverter automatically
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter
should automatically reset.
NOTE:
The Power Inverter will only turn on if the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will turn off if the power rating is
exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
2
background
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower
switch bank of the instrument panel and can be
used to power various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can
be
changed via the Uconnect settings. All
switches can be configured for setting the
switch type operation to latching or momentary,
power source of either battery or ignition, and
ability to hold last state across key cycles.
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
s
wi
tch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For more information, refer to “Uconnect
Set
tings” in “Multimedia”.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
pow
er four blunt cut wires. These wires are
located under the instrument panel in the
passenger compartment and under the hood to
the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections — Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
fus
ed battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are
pro
vided with the auxiliary switches to aid in the
connection/installation of your electrical
devices.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Und
erhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
U
nd
erhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
U
nd
erhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
U
nd
erhood (right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
2
background
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Bed Rail Tie Down System allows you to
properly secure cargo in the truck bed.
Bed Rail Tie Down Locations
There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on
eac
h side of the bed that can be used to assist
in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in
one
of the detents along either utility rail in
order to keep cargo properly secured.
To move the utility rail cleat to any position on
the
utility rail, turn the cleat retainer nut
counterclockwise several times. Then, pull out
on the utility rail cleat and slide it to the detent
nearest the desired location. Make sure the
utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and
tighten the nut.
To remove the utility rail cleats from the side
uti
lity rails, slide the cleat to the rectangular
cutout located at the end of the rail toward the
front of the vehicle.
To remove the utility rail cleat from the front
ut
i
lity rail, slide the cleat to the rectangular
cutout located on the left side of the rail.
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to keep cargo out of view, and protect
from inclement weather.
The Tonneau Cover consists of the following
fea
tures:
Easy roll up cover
Tonneau fore/aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Rear latches
Stowage straps
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and
sec
ured at the front of the truck bed without
removing it completely.
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not
exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the
load on each cleat should not exceed 45
degrees above horizontal, or damage to the
cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as
follows:
1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on
th
e truck bed and align it to the two
fastener locations at the front of the bed.
Fastener Locations
2. U
sing a #T50 T
orx head driver, secure the
fas teners to the bed.
3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position
be
fore unrolling the Tonneau Cover.
4. Release the stowage straps used to secure
th
e Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.
Release Stowage Strap
5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the
ba
ck of the truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward
6. P
osition both Tonneau Cover latches over
th
e locking mechanisms (one on each side
of the truck bed), making sure the plastic
retainer is correctly seated in the forward
part of the latch.
Correctly Seated Retainer
Incorrectly Seated Retainer
2
background
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is posi-
tioned over the locking mechanism, grasp
the
back of the Tonneau Cover and push
downward on the center to engage the
locking mechanisms. Make sure an audible
“click” from both sides of the Tonneau
Cover are heard to confirm that the latch is
completely engaged.
Push Downward To Lock
NOTE:
If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this
pos
ition (rear panel folded forward) while the
tailgate is closed, or the tailgate can be raised
to the mid-position. Refer to “Tailgate” in this
chapter for further information.
Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position
8. Fold the rear panel down; the tailgate can
no
w be raised and secured in place.
NOTE:
If not leaving the tailgate in the mid-position, the
T
on
neau Cover must be closed completely prior
to fully closing the tailgate.
Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the tailgate.
2.
Fold the rear panel of the Tonneau Cover
fo
rward to reveal the red release straps.
Release Strap Location
3. Pull one of the red release straps to release
th
e Tonneau Cover latch.
CAUTION!
Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to
the cover and/or cargo will occur.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE:
Pulling either strap will release the latches to
rol
l the Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to
pull both at the same time.
4. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting
wi
th the rear bar and continue to roll toward
the front of the truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Forward
5. U
sing the stowage straps, secure the
To
nneau Cover in the rolled up position.
Secured Tonneau Cover
6. Using a #T50 T
orx head driver, remove the
two fasteners securing the Tonneau Cover
to the front of the truck bed.
Fastener Locations
7. U
tilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover
up
and away from the truck bed.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been
c
om
pletely rolled up, and straps are secure,
before removing.
8. Store in a safe location.
2
background
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY
.
The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to allow for
car
rying an additional cargo load on a Hard Top
Vehicle. The load carried on the roof, when
equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed
100 lbs (45 kg), this includes the weight of the
crossbars, and it should be uniformly
distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
car
go is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dea
ler through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
car
rying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the
windshield, should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward loads. It is
recommended to not carry large flat loads,
such as wood panels or surfboards, which
may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as
additional securing points if needed. Tie
loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
background
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis
-
factorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the
fuel filler door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting
And
Operating” for further information.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine
damage will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
background
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. The Driver Interactive
Display, located in the instrument panel,
indicates how systems are operating and gives
you warnings when a system, or systems, needs
your attention. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want to
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales,
Compass Direction, Outside Temperature,
Time, Range, Audio Info, MPG or Trip are
displayed. This also displays the
Speedometer which is an option for the
upper center reconfigurable, but is not the
default. Default setting is Menu Title.
The main display area where the menus and
pop up messages are displayed.
The lower line where telltales, menu name
and menu page are displayed.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button:
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
Mai
n Menu items.
Down Arrow Button:
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the
Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button:
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
scr
eens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item.
Left Arrow Button:
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
scr
eens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item.
OK Button:
Push the OK button to access/select the
inf
ormation screens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
1 — OK Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
3
background
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ig
nition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
In
fo" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK
button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Pro
cedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ig
nition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
th
ree times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ig
nition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
sta
rt the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Off Road+ Display — If Equipped
When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the
switch bank, the Instrument Cluster Display will
begin to show messages related to the feature.
Depending on the Four Wheel Drive mode in
use, the messages will differ, and after five
seconds, all messages will clear from the
display. The messages are as follows:
2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD
4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active
4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Speed
Con
trol are not available when using Off Road+.
If either option is selected, a dedicated
message will display indicating that the
features are not usable concurrently. Messages
are as follows:
4H: Speed Control — Cruise Control
Unavailable in Off Road+
4H: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable in Off
Road+
4L: Speed Control — Cruise Control
Unavailable in 4WD Low
4L: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low
NOTE:
The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while
in
Off Road+ varies depending on the 4WD
status. If the vehicle is in 4H, Traction Control is
automatically turned off. Also, holding the ESC
Off button for five seconds will turn off ESC. In
4L, Electronic Stability Control automatically
shuts off regardless of the Off Road Status.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
s
et
tings may vary.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
dis
play in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this
sec
tion for further information.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to toggle between mph
and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push
and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Off Road — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front
wheel angle from the steering wheel
orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic
with text message (connected or discon-
nected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the
g
ra
phic with the angle number on the screen.
• Speedometer • Stop/Start
• Vehicle Info • Audio
• Off-Road — If
Equipped
• Driver Assist — If
Equ ipped
• Messages • Fuel Economy
• Screen Setup • Trip Info
Tire Pressure Coolant
Temperature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure Oil Life
Battery Voltage
3
background
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to
dis
play the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the ACC system.
Push and release the up o
r down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If
Equ
ipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
cur
rent Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF
but
ton (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Ad
aptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
set
ting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on
the
steering wheel), and the following will
display in the instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cru
ise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy
feature.
Toggle left or r
ight to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 10 mi (16 km), the
Ran
ge display will change to a “LOW”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message
and a new Range value will display. Range
cannot be reset through the OK button.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loa
ding will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the
last reset.
Current – The display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while
driving.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display, then push and
release the left or right arrow button to select
Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
foll
owing:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK b
utton to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop
-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
pre
vious media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the right arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu
ico
n will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored
Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
NOTE:
The Screen Setup feature can only be used
whi
le the vehicle is not in motion.
Push and release the up o
r down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location in which that information is
displayed.
3
background
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Menu Title (default setting)
Speedometer
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default Setting)
Time
Range to Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped (show/hide)
Driver Assist — If Equipped (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings
Gear Display — Premium Cluster Only
Full (default)
Single
Current Gear
Off (default)
On
Odometer
Show (default)
Hide
Defaults
Cancel
Restore
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode
Message, And Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
fai
lure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
run
ning. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Ba
ttery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has
a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equ
ipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more
of
the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12
Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable
appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
3
background
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or
exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower,
temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and ignition
off draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during
consecutive trips and the evaluation of the
vehicle and driving pattern did not help to
identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
wil
l turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stay
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
lev
el and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
bra
king capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
cor
rected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
c
or
nering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
nec
essary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
Sys
tem (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
che
cked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
bra
ke is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
app
lied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it
stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
ele
ctrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
s
in
gle chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Ste
ering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Electro - Hydraulic Power Steering” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
background
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Thr
ottle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
b
ra
ke pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
run
ning, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
eng
ine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
t
ra
nsmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of
Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully
clos
ed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
sin
gle chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
lig
ht turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
cor
rected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
hig
h. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unb
uckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or
front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain
on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt is unbuckled in the second row.
Whe
n the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific
seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the
instrument cluster display, momentarily
replacing the configurable corner information. If
a second row seat belt that was buckled at the
start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from green to red
and a single chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
tem
perature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
veh
icle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt is unbuckled in the second row.
Whe
n the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific
seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the
instrument cluster display, momentarily
replacing the configurable corner information. If
a second row seat belt that was buckled at the
start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to
the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
background
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
lig
ht will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
dri
ving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ign
ition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is
Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30
mph (48 km/h), see an
aut
horized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off
.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC
/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
clos
e the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will
tur
n on and a chime will sound. The
light will remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Se
rvicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onb
oard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the
light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. It is recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Col
lision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mit
igation” in “Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
fun
ctioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Speed Control System is
not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
background
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is
a fault in the sway bar disconnect
sys
tem.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive
Ope
ration” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire life and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
men
tioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
sho
uld be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
bee
n equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
pro
per tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPM
S malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi
-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
uously illuminated. This sequence will continue
u
po
n subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mod
e, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mod
e. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part
tim
e mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates when front and/or
rear axle locker fault has been
det
ected.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“St
arting And Operating” for further
information.
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
War
ning is off.
Refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates when the front,
rear, or both axles have been locked.
The
telltale will display the lock icon
on the front and rear axles to indicate
the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the neutral mode.
Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“St
arting And Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
background
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive
Ope
ration” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is
not operating and needs service.
Ref
er to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front sway bar is discon-
nected.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive
Ope
ration” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Off Road+ Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when Off Road+ has been activated.
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“St
arting And Operating” for further
information.
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Bed Lamp has been
act
ivated.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Tar
get Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
the
re is no target vehicle detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected. Refer
to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mod
e. The system will provide power
to all four wheels and shift the power
between the front and rear axles as needed.
This will provide maximum traction in dry and
slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set to the
des
ired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To
Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
tur
ned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Au
tostop” mode.
Refer to “Stop/Start System —
Aut
omatic Transmission (If Equipped)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
fla
sh independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
tur
n signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt has been buckled in the second
row
. A telltale will display in the upper
right corner of the instrument cluster
display to correspond to the specific seating
position once the seat belt has been buckled.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If
Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Con
trol (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped With a Base Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Con
trol (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped With a Base Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Con
trol (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light — If
Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the two wheel drive high
mod
e.
3
background
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “Four — Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt has been buckled in the second
row
. A telltale will display in the upper
right corner of the instrument cluster
display to correspond to the specific seating
position once the seat belt has been buckled.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt is unbuckled in the second row.
Whe
n the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific
seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the
instrument cluster display, momentarily
replacing the configurable corner information. If
a second row seat belt that was buckled at the
start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to
the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates when the rear
passenger seats are unoccupied, and
wil
l illuminate in the upper right
portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the configurable
corner information.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set
. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Ope
rating” for further information.
Selec - Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec -
Speed Control is activated. Selec -
Spe
ed Control is available in 4WD
Low ONLY.
Refer to “Selec - Speed Control (SSC) - If
Equ
ipped” in “Safety” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set
. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
hea
dlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
background
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in
“Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci
-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
inc
luding personal information.
3
background
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states and/or provinces that
require an Inspection and
M
ai
ntenance (I/M), this check verifies
the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
whi
ch you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
bu
t do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
s
ta
rt this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
th
e ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
a
s
part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
th
ings will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, yo
u should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
sys
tem is ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because
the MIL is on with the engine running.
background
131
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
tha
t the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound,
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
sys
tem detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS
activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed
or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause
possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
132 SAFETY
NOTE:
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equ
ipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
bra
ke system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system . This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distri-
bution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
B
ra
ke Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together
to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Swa
y Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Selec-Speed Control (SSC), and Rain Brake
Support (RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) by applying the brakes very
quickly, creating the most efficient braking
assistance possible. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
background
SAFETY 133
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles, by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it
then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel
lift due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mod
e (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete expla
-
nation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the
vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Ligh
t” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
background
134 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the
ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whe
never the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
whe
n a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
pus
h the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 135
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a
mom
entary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may
be required to return to ESC on.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off
-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Pa
rtial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by off-road
mod
es (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
clus
ter will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30
mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dea
ler as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited
slip feature described in the TCS section),
has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
136 SAFETY
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS)
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the placed in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
hav
e the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors
are attached, then the door must be closed.
If the doors are detached then the driver's
seatbelt must be buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
background
SAFETY 137
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will period-
ically apply a small amount of brake pressure to
r
em
ove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an
emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Control will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec - Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec - Speed Control (SSC) is intended for
off-road driving in 4L Range only. SSC maintains
vehicle speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
ac
tivate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
ac
tivation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
co
ntrolling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
t
he
following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4L Range.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The park brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
The driver is not applying throttle.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake
pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake or apply
more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
138 SAFETY
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automat-
ically once the following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The transmission is in any selection other
than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
dri
ver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is
used for SSC target speed selection but will
not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. While actively controlling SSC,
the transmission will shift appropriately for
the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain
Select mode. This difference may be notable
to the driver and may be perceived as a
varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with
thr
ottle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any
of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with
throttle or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph
(32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph
(64
km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
f
oll
owing conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4L Range.
The park brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
background
SAFETY 139
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC
switch has a lamp which offers feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will
illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enabled
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Alw
ays use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda
-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Ope
rating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malf
unction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced, and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin for each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off-road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
4
background
140 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the taillights,
to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
l
ig
ht will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.
8 m). The zone starts at the outside rear view
mir
ror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
bey
ond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6
mph (10 km/h) or
hig
her and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The area on the taillights, where the radar
sen
sors are located, must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the taillights where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (brush guards,
bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
background
SAFETY 141
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” in this chapter for further
information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
f
ro
m three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
f
ro
m either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
o
n either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30
mph
(48
km/h).
Rear Monitoring
4
background
142 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
spe
ed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
veh
icle remains in the blind spot for approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
i
ll
uminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15
mph
(24
km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
ale
rt on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are
traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
background
SAFETY 143
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sid
es of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3
mph (5 km/h), to
obj
ects moving a maximum of approximately
20
mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
sit
uations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
b
e
obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the
driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
C
hi
me mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
4
background
144 SAFETY
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
res
pond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. The RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mod
e when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
l
oo
king sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
background
SAFETY 145
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
t
he
se progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn
-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the
driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
bel
ow 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
pro
vide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
F
or
ward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
t
he
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
4
background
146 SAFETY
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full
On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On”
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning “, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collisions with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer colli
-
sions with the vehicle in front using
aud
ible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
background
SAFETY 147
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Alt
hough the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. T
his device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until
t
he
tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
app
roximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after a three
hou
r period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pre
ssure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
4
background
148 SAFETY
(Continued)
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tir
e pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPM
S Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
rec
ommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
eno
ugh to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
n
ee
d to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 149
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tir
e pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
com
ponents:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
a
nd
a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "Tire Low" message for a minimum
of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
pos
sible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off.
4
background
150 SAFETY
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
nee
d to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 m
inutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for
the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
War
ning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
rep
eat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Ful
l Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
fu
ll size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
fu
ll size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle,
the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
in the instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value and an
"Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPM
S Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “Service Tire Pressure System” message
for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. F
or each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
wi
ll sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pres
-
sure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
ti
re and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
background
SAFETY 151
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20
minutes
abo
ve 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPM
S to receive this information.
Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching
fu
ll-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and
can be monitored by the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size
sp
are tire is swapped with a low pressure
road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on,
a chime to sound, an “Inflate to XX”
message to appear in the instrument
cluster, and the graphic display will still
show the low tire pressure value in a
different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 m
inutes
abo ve 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the
TPM
S Warning Light as long as none of road
tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tir
e pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the
Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the
Uconnect System.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPM system fault is set to “active”
or if the system is in deactivation mode (if
equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
det
ects an increase in tire pressure while filling
the tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode with the transmission in PARK for
vehicles equipped with an Automatic
Transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
Manual Transmission, the park brake must be
applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
ent
er Tire Fill Alert Mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
veh
icle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard
lamps do not come on while inflating the tire,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) sensor may
be in an inoperative position, preventing the
TPM sensor signal from being received. In this
case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire
pre
ssure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
over filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the
tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
4
background
152 SAFETY
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then under-inflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert — If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
opt
ional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow you to select a pressure to
inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear
axle tires to, and to provide feedback while
inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application,
whi
ch is located in the apps menu of the
Uconnect System, you will be able to select a
pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure
range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values
for
the front and rear axles as shown on the
vehicle placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for
eac
h axle in the Uconnect System application
as preset pressure values. Up to two sets of
preset pressure values can be stored in the
Uconnect System for the front and rear axle.
Once you select the tire pressures for the front
and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate
to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at
a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
def
lating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPM
rec
eiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles
with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in
vehicles with a manual transmission. The
hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire
pre
ssure screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. If the hazard lamps do not
come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) sensor may be
in an inoperative position, preventing the TPM
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inf
lated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pr
essure is reached to let you know when
to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
ov
er-inflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough
ai
r is added or removed to reach proper
selected pressure level.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
fou
r wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
whe
el and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPM
S will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
background
SAFETY 153
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
wil
l no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in
place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph
(24
km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
War
ning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the
next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
sec
tion may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
min
imize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
al
ways ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
ve
hicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor
-
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
chi
ld restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position. (Refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further
information).
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
re
ar-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
be
lt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
wi
th your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
an
d shoulder belts properly.
4
background
154 SAFETY
(Continued)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
yo
ur vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
f
or
cefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be
modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact infor
-
mation.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
e
qu
ipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
s
wi
tch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
w
he
n the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equ
ipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not
active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
aut
horized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
dur
ing very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
4
background
156 SAFETY
(Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 157
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
in
sert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
li
es low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
sh oulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with
-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on
the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
t
o
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
4
background
158 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
po
ssible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 i
nches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
we
bbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
cle
ars the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
w
il
l prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height
adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.
background
SAFETY 159
(Continued)
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
inc
luding pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abd
omen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten
-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
t
ho
se in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
s
ea
t belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occ
upant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly fit
the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE
the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6
inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove
and store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
160 SAFETY
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped
w
it
h an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
aut
omatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
be
lt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
wa
rd until the entire seat belt is extracted.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
background
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and
allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim next to each of the rear seats. This
clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path
of the seatback when it is being folded and
opened. Only place the seat belt webbing in this
clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not
leave the webbing behind the clip when using
the belt to restrain an occupant.
Rear Stow Clip
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the rear seat stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will
not be positioned properly on the occupant
and they could be more seriously injured in
an accident as a result.
4
background
162 SAFETY
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the air
bag
system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
sys
tem that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon
-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
t
he
instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
ill
uminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
rel
ated gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
background
SAFETY 163
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light is detected,
whi
ch could affect the
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Red
undant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
4
background
164 SAFETY
(Continued)
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
dur
ing an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
fro
nt passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
Sys
tem (“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The
OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending
on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed
to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an
adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator
Lig
h
t (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or
whe
n very light objects are placed on the seat,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag
Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illu
-
minated.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag
to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 165
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
dec
eleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
fro
nt air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upp
er passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to activate
or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated
weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an
unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category
other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Con
sists Of The Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located on the
overhead sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
4
background
166 SAFETY
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
loc
ated underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether it should activate or
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the
seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright.
Facing forward.
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
Sitting with their back against the seat back
and the seat back in an upright position.
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
P
as
senger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
child, including a child seated in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child or small
adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
background
SAFETY 167
(Continued)
* When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT
illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adu
lt, allowing the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to
ride in the front passenger seat and never
install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag
Disa
bled Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other
rel
atively light objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
res
traint or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
168 SAFETY
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PA
D) Indicator Light (an amber light located on
the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and
front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator
light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT
illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be
ill
uminated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. The driver
and adult passenger should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult
is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD
Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated
and
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
should be deactivated for most properly seated
and restrained children in the passenger seat
and for most properly installed child restraint
systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint
system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be
illuminated, even though the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the
lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD
Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
PAD
Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
Adu
lt Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
pas
senger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated, the passenger may be sitting
improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the
OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
pa
ssenger step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the
pa
ssenger seat, such as cushions, pads,
seat covers, seat massagers, blankets,
extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright
po
sition.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
th
e seat, with the passenger’s feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor, and with their back
a
ga
inst the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
re
main in this seated position for two to
three minutes after restarting the vehicle.
background
SAFETY 169
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
sma
ll adult, occupies the passenger seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be
deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger,
including a small adult (depending on size) who
is seated in the passenger seat. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the
PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD
Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
wor
ds “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front
Pas
senger’s Seated Weight On The Front
Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
pro
perly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in deactivation or activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in deactivation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or
death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains
illuminated for an adult passenger, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in
the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4
background
170 SAFETY
Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
pro
bable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
background
SAFETY 171
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
pas
senger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
ope
ration of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on
after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
d
ri
ve, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS
components that may affect Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small
teenager or adult in the front passenger
seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS
that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,
backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the
front passenger seat. Holding an object
may provide an output signal to the OCS
that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bags to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
remain deactivated until the fault is
cleared. This indicates that you should take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
172 SAFETY
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Sea
t-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SA
Bs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service
procedures to the passenger seat
assembly, its related components, seat
cover, or cushion may inadvertently change
the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or
serious injury to the front passenger if the
vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
background
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
t
he
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
cer
tain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
col
lisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
res
traint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
4
background
174 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
tri
m, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
w
ir
ing associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
c
ol
lisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bag
s, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your
protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must
wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 175
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that
generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with
cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see
your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
dep
loyed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enh
anced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
4
background
176 SAFETY
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC
Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
r
em
ove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
background
SAFETY 177
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
und
erstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non
-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce
-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
o
f
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equ
ipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
pro
perly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
background
178 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
tha t it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who
have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Res traint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
hav
e outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Har ness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
chi
ld restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
sea
t belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out
grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
veh
icle
background
SAFETY 179
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
veh
icle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
for
ward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
4
background
180 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
th
e back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
th
e front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
sh
oulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
to
uching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
wh
ole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
sea
t in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
background
SAFETY 181
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Chi
ld + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anc
hors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
A
nc
hors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tet
her Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Res
traint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing
Chi
ld Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing
Ch
i
ld Restraint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
4
background
182 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) / ISOFIX Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anc
horage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
w
ei
ght of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
t
he
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
background
SAFETY 183
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anc
horage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors
in
the center position. The inner anchorages are
19.2
inches (488 mm) apart. Do not install child
res
traints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
low
er LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
res
traints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
fro
nt passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
sea
t if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
wit
h the installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for
further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
background
184 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cus
hion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child
res
traint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The
LATC
H-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
background
SAFETY 185
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
an
d on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
an
chorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
ch
ild restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
co
nnect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc
-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
ch
ild restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac
-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
ti
ghtly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1
inch (25.4 mm) in any
dir
ection.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
4
background
186 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
pos
itions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
des
cription in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sec
tions for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Chi
ld Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
ins
tall a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
fro
nt passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
r
es
traint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
background
SAFETY 187
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
se
ating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust
-
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
th
e retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
he
ar a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
ti
ght against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
sh
oulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is
not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
wit
h the installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
aga
inst the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
background
188 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc
-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. T
est that the child restraint is installed
ti
ghtly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1
inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
c
he
ck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
The Top Tether anchorages are located behind
each rear seating position. To attach the tether
strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
ad
just the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint and to the tether anchor directly
behind the seat.
2. Release the seat back by pulling the release
st
rap located on the top of the seat back to
provide room to reach the tether anchor.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
di
rect path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go
between the head restraint posts under
-
neath the head restraint. You may need to
adj
ust the head restraint (if adjustable) to
the upward position to pass the tether strap
underneath the head restraint and between
its posts.
4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on
th
e cab back wall (inside the opening
labeled with the tether anchorage symbol.)
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
background
SAFETY 189
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch
engages and no red indicator is showing on
the strap
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the
ch
ild seat manufacturer's instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equ
ipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the
seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
190 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
aft
er a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ign
ition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermit
-
tently or remains on while driving, have an
a
ut
horized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
SAFETY 191
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the pedal
assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of
your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
ins
tall your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or
stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
background
192 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
background
193
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector
in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine
wil
l start regardless of whether or not the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the
vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The “4WD Low Indicator
Light” will illuminate when the transfer case has
been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
PARK position (vehicle can also be started in
NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NE
UTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pu
shing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
th
e vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
en
gine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
background
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
eng
ine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STO
P Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
an
d release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3.
If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
ve
hicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the transmis
-
sion will automatically select PARK and the
eng
ine will turn off, however the ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
ve
hicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pus
hing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once will turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 m
ph
(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button
mus
t be held for two seconds (or three short
pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT
the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off
when the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
i
gn
ition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30
minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
the
ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Dri
ver’s Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
sim
ilar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to
place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
se
cond time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”).
4. P
ush the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
ti
me to return the ignition to the OFF mode
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
eng
age are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
con
ditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed
transmission
Driver door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an additional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad
sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The
eng
ine will turn off and the ignition will change
to ACC mode. After 30
minutes the ignition
swi
tches to OFF automatically, unless the driver
turns the ignition OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
con
ditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed
transmission
Driver door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an additional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad
sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver door is removed
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less
Driver seat belt is unbuckled
Driver door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “Aut
oPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
dis
played in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
veh
icle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY
when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less.
The message “Veh
icle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2
mph
(2.
0 km/h).
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2
mph
(2.
0 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
pos
ition can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
5
background
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
veh
icle in 4WD LOW.
The message “Aut
oPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
whe
n both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “Aut
oPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from
your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold
Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in
the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal
and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
lea
st one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the
hoo
d bundled in front of the battery tray.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(50
0 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
spe
eds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
des
irable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
wit
hin the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
fac
tory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality
gra
des, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
fir
st few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
t
he
break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
5
background
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST
gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
con
sole behind the gear selector. To apply the
parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the
lever up slightly, push the center button, then
lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the
ign
ition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
“Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle
speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
fro
nt wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an
automatic transmission as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
inc
reased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
Manual Transmission Shifter
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and
place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engagement
of the gears is displayed on the handle of the
selector).
Be sure the parking brake is fully
disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
an automatic transmission in PARK, a
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle
on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.
5
background
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and move the gear selector all the way
left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting
fro
m a standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
t
he
clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but
it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the trans
-
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not
an
indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
(Continued)
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed
chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be
significantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at
the right time provides better acceleration when
you desire to resume speed. Downshift progres
-
sively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding
the
engine and clutch.
NOTE:
Above certain speeds downshifts may be
bloc
ked and not available.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle
could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt to
shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
depressed may result damage to the clutch
system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing
the clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
5
background
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Failure to follow the maximum
recommended downshifting speeds may
cause engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal depressed could result in clutch
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shi
fting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when exiting
the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
background
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock system which requires the
transmission to be in PARK before the ignition
can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
press the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
s
ele
ctor position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu
-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
pos
ition, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
ada
pts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
whe
n the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REV
ERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
(Continued)
current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
"AutoStick" in this section for further
information.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
P
AR
K, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument
clus
ter. Move the gear selector to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to
allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
loc
king the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
bef
ore shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake,
Shift the transmission into PARK,
Turn the ignition OFF and,
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
tra
nsfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when exiting
the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
5
background
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the gear selector all the way forward until it
stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PAR
K position (when pushed forward), it is prob-
ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
D
RI
VE position). In AutoStick mode, the trans-
mission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
i
ns
trument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shi
ft into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
pro
longed periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
hig hway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving character
-
istics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(su
ch as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-3
0°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
5
background
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
pos
ition) enables full manual control of
transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick
mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electron-
ically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
det
ected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at
all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument
cluster will inform the driver of the more serious
conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
tra
nsmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
ind
icates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2.
Shift the transmission into PARK, if
po
ssible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
bu
tton until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5.
Restart the engine.
6.
Shift into the desired gear range. If the
pr
oblem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
r
ec
ommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho
-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
ass
ess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dea
ler service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
sele
ctor into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position). The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually
shift the transmission. Tapping the gear
selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M)
position will downshift the transmission to the
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward
(+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
The transmission will automatically
downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent
engine lugging) and will display the current
gear.
The transmission will automatically
downshift to FIRST gear when coming to a
stop. After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range).
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or
THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position
will downshift the transmission to the lowest
gear possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick
is
not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
sele
ctor to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Four-Position Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
5
background
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate
use
of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
nor
mal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
max
imizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
fro
nt and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Ope
rating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
p
ro
vides low speed four-wheel drive. It
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25
mph
(40
km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H
position for normal street and highway
conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required,
the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be
used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components.
Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for
further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
veh
icle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
spe
ed will be approximately three times (four
times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
dep
ends on tires of equal size, type, and circum-
ference on each wheel. Any difference will
a
dv
ersely affect shifting and cause damage to
the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
tra
ction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45
mph (72 km/h).
Wit
h the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after completing
the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when
shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
inc
reased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
N
EU
TRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
tra
nsfer case lever firmly to the desired
position. Do not pause with the transfer case in
N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
veh
icle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be
required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3
mph
(3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or
dis
engage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
5
background
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one
driving wheel. If traction differs between the two
rear wheels, the differential automatically
proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
dri
ving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
con
ditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range).
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK
swi
tch down to lock the rear axle only (the
“REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch
up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear
axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch
again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
ful
ly locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
but
ton.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out
of 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above
30 m
ph (48 km/h), and will automatically
re-
lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16
km/h).
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one
rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground and cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar.
This system allows greater front suspension
travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
swi
tch located on the instrument panel (to the
right of the steering column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to disconnect or
con
nect the sway bar. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during
activation transition, or when activation
conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar
should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
eit
her 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch
to obtain the off-road position. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for
further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has
been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due
to left and right suspension height differ-
ences. This condition is due to driving surface
d
if
ferences or vehicle loading. In order for the
stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked
from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
swi
tch again.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
speeds above 18
mph (29 km/h); a
dis
connected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with
vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18
mph
(29
km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
sol
id “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle
speed is reduced below 14
mph (22 km/h),
the
system will once again attempt to return
to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18
mph (29 km/h).
Dri
ving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
dis
connected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
5
background
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off Road+ — If Equipped
Off Road+ Switch
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to
imp
rove the user experience when using
specific Off Road driving modes. To activate Off
Road+, push the Off Road+ switch in the switch
bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve
depending of which Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
mode is activated.
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in Two Wheel Drive
Hig
h (2H) mode. If the button is pushed while in
2H mode, the cluster display will show the
message “Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features
wil
l activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the
Instrument Cluster Display
A mode specific message will display the
Instrument Cluster Display
Off Road pages will launch on the radio
head-unit (if equipped)
The Off Road Camera will launch (if
equipped)
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to
beh
ave in different ways depending on the 4WD
mode in use. The following enhancements will
occur when using Off Road+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl
and controllability focus, change in shifting
schedule when rock crawling, pedal
calibration shifted to de-gain and low range,
operates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differ-
ential tuning at slower speed or 1st gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between
ignition cycles
4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved
sand performance/ wheel slip focus, change
in shift schedule for sport mode, pedal
calibration set to aggressive, operates at
elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip
tuning brake lock differential with no engine
management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with
unlimited speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between
ignition cycles
Speed Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(AC
C) will not function while using Off Road+. A
dedicated cluster message will display
indicating this if either feature is activated while
in Off Road+.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off
Road+, the following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC Button: Traction Control will
turn off, but Stability Control will remain
active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds:
Traction Control and Stability Control will turn
off.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electro-hydraulic power steering system that
will give you good vehicle response and
increased ease of maneuverability in tight
spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while
driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING”
message and a flashing icon are
d
is
played on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an
ico
n are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be
a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see your authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is
developed to reduce fuel consumption. The
system will stop the engine automatically during
a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
dut
y starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop
power steering assistance in order to prevent
damage to the system. Normal operation will
resume once the system is allowed to cool.
5
background
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system
be
disabled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
bat
tery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
sta
rt. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Mus
t Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
mov
e to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed
HVAC set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
Engine temperature too high
The transmission is not in a forward gear
Hood is open
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Inc
lude:
Accelerator pedal input
Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from
previous auto-stop
Steering angle beyond threshold
ACC is on and speed is set
Vehicle is at high altitude
System fault present
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
sev
eral times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Aut
omatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
5
background
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
ap
pear in instrument cluster display within
the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your Instru
-
ment Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
St
op/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to
an ON condition every time the ignition is
cycled off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
mes
sage appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is
developed to reduce fuel consumption. The
system will stop the engine automatically during
a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Pressing the clutch pedal will automat
-
ically restart the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system
b
e
disabled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
bat
tery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
sta
rt. It will remain in STOP/START
NOT READY until you drive forward
with a vehicle speed greater than 5
mph
(8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STO
P/START READY and if all other conditions
are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
Mod
e, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
(3 k m/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position and the clutch pedal must be fully
released.
The engine will shut down, the
tachometer will
fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START
AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and
the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air flow will
be reduced.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. In following situations the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Outside temperature is less than 10°F
(–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C)
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
Battery discharged
When driving in REVERSE
Hood is open
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is
open
Vehicle is at high altitude
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Forward Gear is engaged
Steering angle beyond threshold
System fault is present
HVAC set to MAX A/C
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
sev
eral times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
5
background
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the
engine will start when the clutch pedal is
pressed (does not require complete/full pedal
press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START
SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5
mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
aut
omatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE mode, the engine will start automatically
when:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes
Battery voltage drops too low
Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake
pedal applications
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear
in
the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
St
op/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually
sw
itched off, the engine can only be started
and stopped by cycling the ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to
an ON condition every time the ignition is
cycled off and back on.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20
mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
r
ig
ht side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Co
n
trol System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
spe
ed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
spe
ed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
spe
ed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument panel settings. Refer to
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — On/Off
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
background
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
de
c
rease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
a
nd
down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occ
ur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20
mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed
control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
spe
ed control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual
transmission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in
the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
dri
ving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
eng
aged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed)
automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
mod
es:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for
maintaining an appropriate distance
between vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
5
background
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
rea
ct to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Con
trol buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode
is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute
for active driving involvement. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
On vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, will bring the vehicle to a complete
sto
p while following a target vehicle and
hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the
stop position. If the target vehicle does
not start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu
-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the
brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp; when driving on roads that
are winding, icy, snow-covered, slip
-
pery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slo
pes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
o
f
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 m
ph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
sta
te, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
dis
plays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
c
on
ditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
When you apply the brakes
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in first gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Ada
ptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
5
background
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will
display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
bel
ow 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
def
aulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
set
when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32
km/h), the set speed shall be the current
spe
ed of the vehicle. On vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, the system cannot be set
when the vehicle speed is below 20
mph
(32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in first gear.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you
do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
The clutch is depressed for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual
transmission only)
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will
cancel and the brake force will be
ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
inc
rements until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
inc
rements until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
dec
reased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
dec
rements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
5
background
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
dec
rements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) button, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to
decelerate, if the engine’s braking power
does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will automat-
ically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, the host vehicle will release the
vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and
downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the
braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
D
is
tance Setting — Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Dis
tance Setting — Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
mai
ntain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
unt
il:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages (Refer to the
information on ACC Activation)
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
how
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
A
CC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
pre
dicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
5
background
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
dis
play is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a target
vehicle, your vehicle will resume motion without
the need for any driver action if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message
will display on the instrument cluster display
and produce a warning chime. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
sta
ndstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
but
ton (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Ad
aptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
s
et
ting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
o
n
the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will
read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
ins
trument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Veh
icle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
suc
h as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sen
sor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
S
en
sor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
sho
uld examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
imp
ortant to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is
no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded
5
background
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Fro
nt Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
sho
uld examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
fun
ctionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Fro
nt Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at your authorized dealer.
“Service ACC/FCW” Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
NOTE:
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Cracks in the windshield may affect the
performance of ACC, depending on the size
and location of the crack.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
5
background
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. There may not be
sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the
accelerator. Cruise Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20
mph
(32
km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
pus
h the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
rea
ched the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
5
background
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is
set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
inc
rements until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
inc
rements until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is
set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
thr
ough the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
dec
rements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
sub
sequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
dec
rements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual
transmission only).
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only).
The clutch is depressed for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only).
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only).
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20
mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommen
-
dations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(en
abled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
sele
ctor is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7
mph (11 km/h) or
abo
ve. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6
mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi
-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
5
background
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
sho
wing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
reg
ion, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rea
r region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
war
ning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 i
nches
(20
0 cm)
79-59 inches
(20
0-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(15 0-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(12 0-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(10 0-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65 -30 cm)
Less than
12 i
nches
(30
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
C
hi
me
None
Single 1/2-
Sec
ond Tone
(for rear center
onl
y)
Slow
(for rear center
onl
y)
Slow
(for rear center
onl y)
Fast
(for rear center
onl y)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Red
uced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
background
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if
on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the climate controls.
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
dis
able the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4L).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Par
kSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SEN
SORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQ
UIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10
cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
(Continued)
(Continued)
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rea
r fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
background
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
system provides visual and audible indications
of the distance between the rear and/or front
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(en
abled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
sele
ctor is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7
mph
(11
km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
ins
trument cluster display indicating the vehicle
is above ParkSense operating speed. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approx
-
imately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi
-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fas
cia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors/ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi
-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm)
from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
Park Assist Ready
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front
reg
ion, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center front region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from a single 1/2
second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
fro
nt region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone For Rear Only
5
background
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
ope
ration when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 i
nches
(20
0 cm)
79-59 inches
(20
0-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(15 0-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(12 0-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(10 0-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65 -30 cm)
Less than
12 i
nches
(30
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
C
hi
me
None
Single 1/2-
Sec
ond Tone
(for rear center
onl
y)
Slow
(for rear center
onl
y)
Slow
(for rear center
onl y)
Fast
(for rear center
onl y)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Red
uced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if
on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
a
ud
ible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and the brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
p
ro
grammable.
The settings may be programmed through the
Uco
nnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low,
med
ium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
wit
h the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed to disable the
sys
tem, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and
the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches / cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(12 0 cm)
47-39 inches
(12 0-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(10 0-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65 -30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert Ch
ime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
5
background
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS”, “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SEN
SORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS” appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQ
UIRED” message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors
quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from
the
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn the ParkSense system off, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic of the ParkSense on/off state for two
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
the “ParkSense OFF” message. This
message will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if obstacles such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rea
r fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to appear in the
instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the
tailgate is in the lowered or open position. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is in REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the tailgate, above the vehicle
license plate.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
5
background
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the
“C
ontrols” button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display, and then press
“Backup Camera”.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
th
e Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect 3 With
5-I
nch Display, there is only one option for
manual activation of the Rear View Camera.
Press the “More” hard button on the Uconnect
system, and then press “Backup Camera”.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(wi
th Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(wi
th Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8
mph
(13
km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PAR
K, the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
act
ivated through the "Backup Camera" button
in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to 8
mph (13 km/h), a
dis
play timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be
displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button "X", the
transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on
the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. A dashed center
line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on
the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the
rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
dis
tances for each zone:
Trailer Hitch Zoom
If equipped, the Trailer Hitch Zoom feature aids
the
driver in lining up a trailer to the vehicle’s
trailer hitch by allowing the driver to toggle back
and forth between the normal view and a 4X
zoom mode by pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon on the touchscreen. The image is displayed
on the radio screen when the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE, as well as manually in
certain situations through the controls screen.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30
cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(
2 m
or greater)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
bui
lds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam
that allows you to you see an on-screen image
of the front view of your vehicle. The image will
be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4L
(Fo
ur-Wheel Drive Low Range).
The TrailCam System has programmable
set
tings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below
met
hods:
Press the “FWD Camera” button on the
controls screen.
Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button
on the apps menu.
Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off Road
Pages.
If equipped, “Auto Launch Off Road+” is
selected under camera settings, and the “Off
Road+” button is pressed.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pre
ssing the icon on the Backup Camera
view. The Backup Camera view can also be
act
ivated by pressing the icon on the
TrailCam view.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
5
background
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(wi
th Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h), the
tra
nsmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button “X” to disable display of the TrailCam
view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated
thr
ough the Manual Activation Methods, and
the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to
8
mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image
is
initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4H, the TrailCam
ima
ge will be displayed continuously until
deactivated via the touchscreen button “X”,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display of the camera image is made
available ONLY when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless
of the vehicle speed and time while in 4L
(Four-Wheel Drive Low Range).
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the “Clean Camera” soft button
l
oc
ated on the TrailCam view to wash the
TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop when the
button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds
at a time while holding the button.
The “Clean Camera” system is not available
when windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
pro
jected on the ground plane of the TrailCam
view based on the steering wheel position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side
of the vehicle. To access the fuel filler cap, push
on the fuel filler door to unlatch it. To close the
fuel filler door, push on it a second time. If the
fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this
vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication
that the cap is properly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly,
the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If
the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP”
message will display in the odometer display.
Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the
system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
man
ufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn
on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using an
improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
background
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR on front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
com
ponents in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
com
mercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adv
erse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
cov
erage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
5
background
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control — If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue. It typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer
manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
d
ri
vetrain in this section.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
background
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined
Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gr oss Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(Se e Note)
Sport - Manual
Transmission
9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
Sport - Automatic
Tra
nsmission
9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Sport - Automatic
Tra
nsmission (Tow
Package)
11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lbs (2,722kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)
Sport - Automatic
T
ra
nsmission (Max Tow
Package)
12,800 lbs (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lbs (3,470 kg) 765 lbs (347 kg)
Sport S - Manual
T
ra
nsmission
9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
Sport S - Automatic
Tra
nsmission
9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Sport S - Automatic
Tra
nsmission (Tow
Package)
11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lbs (2,722 kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)
Sport S - Automatic
T
ra
nsmission (Max Tow
Package)
12,800 lbs (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lbs (3,470 kg) 765 lbs (347 kg)
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
NOTE:
When using a bumper mounted ball on any
model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500
lbs (1,588 kg), 30
ft
2
(2.79 m
2
) frontal area,
and 350 lbs (159 kg) tongue weight.
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR
should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
Overland - Manual
Tra
nsmission
9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
Overland - Automatic
Tra
nsmission
9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Overland - Automatic
Tra
nsmission (Tow
Package)
11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,000 lbs (2,722 kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)
Rubicon - Manual
T
ra
nsmission
10,000 lbs (4,536 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Rubicon - Automatic
Tra
nsmission
12,450 lbs (5,647 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,000 lbs (3,175 kg) 700 lbs (317 kg)
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
5
background
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle
The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
tra
iler adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for proper inspection
procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire replacement
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause
inadequate braking and possible personal
injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
NOTE:
This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller
con
nector under the dash to the left of the
brake pedal. This will be a four pin connector
and will be gray in color.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can
overload your brake system and cause it to
fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
sev
en-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wir
ing harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Towing any trailer will increase your
stopping distance. When towing, you
should allow for additional space between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
bra
kes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
background
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away
from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
tow
ing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid
excessive clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
und
er heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent
downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose
“4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired
speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you
experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16
km/h), disengage until you can get back
to
cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift
t
he
transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
background
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N)
Neu
tral, automatic transmission must be in
PARK, and manual transmission must be in
gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
le
vel ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3.
Shift the automatic transmission into
NE
UTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in
PARK for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into (N)
Neutral” to be certain that the transfer case
is fully in (N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal
damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in (N)
Neutral before recreational towing to prevent
damage to internal parts.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6.
Start the engine.
7.
Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8.
Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on
manual transmissions) for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle move
-
ment.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans-
mi
ssion in DRIVE or manual transmission in
fir
st gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11
. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12
. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
ma
nual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
su
itable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
le
aving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3.
Start the engine.
4.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
5.
Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6.
Turn the engine off.
7.
Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
po
sition.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N)
N
eu
tral, the engine should remain off to avoid
gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
or
place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10
. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11
. Start the engine.
12
. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13
. Release the parking brake.
14
. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
br
ake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions), and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting
the transmission into PARK.
5
background
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a b
etter view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
rem
oved to prevent damage.
1. There are two nuts connecting to the body
si
de and one bolt connecting to the under-
body on each attachment bracket. There
a
re
four attachment brackets on each side
step.
Fastener Locations (One Side)
2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the
un
derside of the vehicle for each of the four
brackets. Repeat for other side of vehicle.
Underside Nuts
3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed,
pu
ll the side step assembly off of the
vehicle.
4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to
th
e body side holes and fasten all nuts on
all four brackets. Then secure all four bolts
to the underbody. Repeat the reassembly
procedure for the other side.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Bumper End Cap Removal — If Equipped
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper
can be removed by following the steps below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel
b
um
per only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR
br
acket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not
remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3.
Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
an
d store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction.
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to
successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a
good driving posture. Avoid sudden acceler
-
ations, turns or braking. In most cases, there
a
re
no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own
good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving
route while remembering what you are currently
driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start System
b
e
disabled during off-road use.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become
projectiles in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials. The heat from
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
fire.
5
background
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low speed pulling power.
This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep
inclines, or sand where additional low speed
pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25
mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
whe
n in 4L range.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs,
or other stepped objects, using light brake
pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle
from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a
vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and
tra
ction at slower speeds, shift the transmission
into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L if
necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning
your steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth, while still applying
throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh
"bite" and help maintain your momentum.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
aro
und the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use DRIVE, with the
transfer case in the 4L position to maintain your
momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth for
additional traction. Mud holes pose an
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
practice before entering any mud hole, get out
and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
ful
l tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's
momentum and do not stop. The key to driving
in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's
momentum. If you are going to be driving on
large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your
traction and handling while driving on the soft
sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to
reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating
the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline
hardware damage can result.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
bring different types of obstacles. Before
proceeding, review the path ahead to determine
the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the
vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a
light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up
and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
o
bs
tacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide
you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have
the person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
whi
ch ensures you drive over the largest of
them with your tires. This will lift your
undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large
rocks with your tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a
l
arge rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when
crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do
not attempt to cross any large obstacle with
steep sides at an angle great enough to put the
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be
able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
large enough to strike your axles or
undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
5
background
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
brakes.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object,
get
out of the vehicle and try to determine what
the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting
the underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a
few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of
the high point when you let the vehicle down.
You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
good understanding of your abilities and your
vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and
should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or
ste
epness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is
the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can
you safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel
confident, shift the transmission into a lower
gear with 4L engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you
climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to
pro
ceed and have shifted into the appropriate
gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant
throttle and apply more power as you start up
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to
lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the
accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
"bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in
REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance
or the vehicle will become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard
objects increases the risk of underbody
damage.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
det
ermine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
then make sure you are in 4L and proceed with
caution. Allow engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline.
If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities.
Driving across an incline places more weight on
the downhill wheels, which increases the
possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
clim
bing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brake.
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
to lock.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type
of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if
possible, and only be attempted when
necessary in a safe, responsible manner. You
should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread
lightly and avoid damage to the environment.
You should know your vehicle's abilities and be
able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when
crossing deep water unless you ingested water
into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
ingested water first. The key to any crossing is
low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,
which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE.
Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only
the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
5
background
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a
constant slow speed (3 to 5
mph{5 to 8 km/h}
max
imum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than
the bottom of the axle differentials, you should
inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to
det
ermine if you can cross it safely and
responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk
through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or muddy waters; check for hidden
obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding
on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively
increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Oth
er Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
are
as normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to
determine you can safely cross, than proceed
using the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Oth
er Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
Nev
er attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water
can easily push your vehicle downstream,
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. You should
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground
clearance. Even the slowest current can push
the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of
control if the water is deep enough to push on
the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles,
transmission, transfer case, engine or
vehicle interior can occur if you drive too
fast or through too deep of water. Water
can cause permanent damage to engine,
driveline or other vehicle components, and
your brakes will be less effective once wet
and/or muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
bef
ore entering as a precaution, and check
all fluids afterward. Driving through water
may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
background
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
current, the water's depth, approach angle,
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
Then cross at an angle heading slightly
upstream using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, driveline, and exhaust system
for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain
components, steering, and suspension.
Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual
tra nsmission bell housing for mud and debris
and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
it out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
5
background
272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
act
ivated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
sho
uld not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
ass
istance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
F
la
shers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASS
IST and an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only
function if you are connected to an operable
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
con
nect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
co
nsole.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
t
he
re will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
an
d SOS buttons on the overhead console
will turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
op
erator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a
v
oice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
S
OS
operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with the vehicle
occupants, and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi
-
nates the connection.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
6
background
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle infor
-
mation and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO
NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mex
ico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact your dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB
radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s
electrical system or modify the antennas on
your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES
BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,
WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or
hardware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
background
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce, and
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
br
ouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
6
background
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
o
r
refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
a
tm
ospheric conditions occur to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for
ser
vice.
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2.
Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
al
ong the top a quarter turn counterclock-
wise and remove.
3. P
ull the bottom of the grille away, starting at
on
e side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the head-
la
mp to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6.
Remove the lamp from the collar.
7.
Grasp the bulb and turn a quarter turn coun-
te
rclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9.
Push connector locking tab to the unlock
po
sition.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11
. Push connector onto new bulb base, and
pu
sh the connector locking tab to the lock
position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a
qu
arter turn clockwise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for
ser
vice.
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
ac
cess bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
co
unterclockwise and remove from
housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
LED Front Side Marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access side maker screw and electrical
connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
fr
ont side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6
background
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker
light assembly.
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer for
ser
vice.
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
ba
ck of the front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
fr
om the front fog lamp connector recep-
tacle.
3. F
irmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
fe
atures and squeeze them together to
unlock the bulb from the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
op
ening in the housing and then connect
the replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps
the
y are replaced as an assembly.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws that pass through
the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screws
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward,
fa
r enough to unsnap the two receptacles
on the outboard side of the lamp housing,
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
3. Remove the screws from assembly bracket
to
access the three bulb sockets.
Assembly Bracket
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter
tu
rn counterclockwise, then remove it from
the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
re
place.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on the tailgate. If
service is needed, obtain the LED assembly
from an authorized dealer.
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace these LED
assemblies.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive electrical current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
out
lets for an extended periods of time with the
engine off it may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and
relays. The PDC top cover is labeled with each
serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and
size.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems (marked with *) must
be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional
fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse)
6
background
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/
E
le
ctric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty
Ele
ctrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
(PC
M)
F23 – 10 Amp Red
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module
(
EC
M)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26
40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL
M
OD
)/Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant
Classification Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection
Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module
(IR
CM)/Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
background
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power
Ste
ering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE
UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD - If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W - If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module ECM
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC)
F
T_
RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter 400W Wake
Up/
USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/Compass
Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker - If Equipped
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red
Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM) or Parktronics
Mo
d
ule
F56 – 10 Amp Red In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue
Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR
WHE
EL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red
Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor
(
RB
SS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
F67 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
background
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F68 – – Spare
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG - If Equipped
F73 – – Spare
F74 – –
Spare
F75 – – Spare
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – – Spare
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid 1 2 Block
S
hi
ft
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR - If Equipped
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG - If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT - If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR - If Equipped
F86 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP - If Equipped
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/#2 - If Equipped
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/Cruise Control
(CR
UISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP - If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 - If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 - If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 - If Equipped
F104
–
– Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
background
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air
Con
ditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT - If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 - If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT - If Equipped
F110 – – Spare
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the
right rear seat. To remove jack and tools
proceed as follows:
1. Fold up the right rear seat.
2.
Remove the jack and tools by turning the
wi
ng bolt counterclockwise, remove the
wing bolt and then lift the assembly out
from under the seat.
Jack And Tools
3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack
an
d remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Ja
ck And Tool Bag
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a
service center where it can be raised on a
lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
background
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with
hoo
k can be added to this assembly to enable
lowering of the spare tire without having to raise
the tailgate.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle.
Access Hole Location
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch
mechanism be sure the large flared end
opening on extension 4 is positioned
correctly over the winch mechanism
adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from
improper tool assembly
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension With Hook
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
2. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
3. R
otate the lug wrench handle counterclock-
wi se until the spare tire is on the ground
wit
h enough cable slack to allow you to pull
it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
4. P
ull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gai
n access to the spare tire retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
cle
arance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wh
eel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
t
he
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
6
background
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3.
Apply the parking brake.
4.
Shift the automatic transmission into PARK
(P
), or a manual transmission into
REVERSE.
5. Cycle the ignition to OFF.
6.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel
di
agonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
whe
n the vehicle is being jacked in position.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
th
e stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(b
ut do not remove) by turning them coun-
terclockwise one turn while the wheel is still
o
n
the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Co
nnect the jack handle driver to the exten-
sion, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. O
perate the jack from the front or the rear of
th
e vehicle. Place the jack under the axle
tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jack Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jack Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
6
background
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clo
ckwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the ground surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7.
Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8.
Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
en
d toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
co
unterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
th
e wrench while tightening for increased
leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has
been tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And
Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
11. After 25 m
iles (40 km), check the lug nut
tor que with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
lo
cations.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle for convenience in checking the
spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
cle
arance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
Reinstalling The Retainer
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tu
bes with the curved angle facing away
from the vehicle. Insert the extension tubes
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into
the winch mechanism tube.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled
And
In Position
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
6
background
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise
until the wheel is drawn into place against
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
turning the jack turn-screw counterclock-
wise until the jack is snug.
2. P
osition the jack and tool bag. Make sure
th
e lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
3. S
ecure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4.
Place the jack and tools in the storage posi-
ti
on holding the jack by the jack turn-screw,
pla
ce the jack and tools under the rear seat.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
fl
oor pan.
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools or bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
f
oll
ow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the
main battery to jump start your vehicle.
Serious injury or death could result if you
attempt to jump start using the supple-
mental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
background
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
p
ro
tective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the post.
Positive Battery Post Cover
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start
sys
tem, it will be equipped with two batteries.
Refer to “Stop/Start System — If Equipped” in
“Starting and Operating” for further
information.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
ma
tic transmission into PARK (P) (manual
tra
nsmission in NEUTRAL) and place the
ignition in OFF mode.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
sa
ry electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
ba
ttery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jum
per cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive
(+
) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+
)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-
) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-
)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
bo
oster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
ju
mper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-
)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-
) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+
) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+
) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
re
mote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
veh
icle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
6
background
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, shift
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) , but do not
increase engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Rel
ease:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2.
Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
re
move the manual park release cover
located in front of the gear selector, to
access the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening
in
the console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
br
ake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until
th
e release lever locks into place in the
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
fr
om the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
do
wnward and to the right, into its original
position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
co
nsole, and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND gear (2) and REVERSE (R) (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R)
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
tra
nsmission remains in NEUTRAL(N) for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the
6
background
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R).
Push the "ESC OFF" switch to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial OFF" mode before rocking the
vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
"ESC OFF" switch again to restore "ESC ON"
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for longer
tha
n 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
dam
age may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage
the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
tra
nsmission shifting occurring).
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
pre
vent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
def rosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to
"Ma
nual Park Release" in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Ope
rating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PAR
K (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEU
TRAL (N)
• Tow in forward d
irection
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
6
background
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
tra
nsfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(P) (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions).
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for detailed instructions.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they
are mounted in the front and the rear bumpers.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
b
ot
h of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appro
-
priately rated tow strap
Front Tow Hook
Rear Tow Hook
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
background
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Sa
fety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when
towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
6
background
306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
cha
nge indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500
miles (5,600 km) since last
res
et. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument
c
lus
ter display, “Oil Change Required” will be
displayed and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On vehicles not equipped with an instrument
clus
ter display, “Change Oil” will flash in the
instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
ind
icator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
i
nt
ervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 m
onths or 350 hours of engine run time,
whi
chever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350
hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
or is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering,
and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pag
es for the required maintenance intervals.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary
7
background
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, rear
sus
pension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
nec
essary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equ
ipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air
fil
ter.
X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine
coo
lant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km),
w
hi
chever comes first.
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
background
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving is
at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using
y
ou
r vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
nec
essary.
X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
(Continued)
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Change front and rear axle fluid if
usi
ng your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
background
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 10 — Engine Air Cleaner
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. The engine oil level should be
checked five minutes after a warmed up engine
has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
gro
und will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart
(0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a
reading at the top of the crosshatch zone on
these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to
a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
sys
tem in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Bot the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
7
background
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
sys
tems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
int
ervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 m
onths or 350 hours of engine run time,
whi
chever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative
post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight
on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the negative battery cables are not
isolated properly it can cause a potential
power spike or surge in the system,
resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Pet
roleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-
30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
rec
ommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” in
this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil
certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
eng
ine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station, or govern
-
mental agency for advice on how and where
use
d oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
t
yp
e disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in
“Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
background
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
mai
ntenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
f
il
ters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance
intervals as shown in the Maintenance
Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner
co
ver using a suitable tool.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Li
ft the air cleaner cover to access the air
cle
aner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
th
e housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
1 — Retainers
2 — Air Filter Cover
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
(Continued)
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
pre
sent before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
ho
using assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a
su
itable tool.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts small
cracks, that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is
not a reason to replace the belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. In addition, have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has
separated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
background
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
ins
talled.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
com
ponent such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use
of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Pol
yalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and
refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer
for your air conditioning system. Some
unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can
cause the system to fail, requiring costly
repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
Book, located online, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains
refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should
be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Filter Replacement
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
al
l contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel
st
op and lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4.
Disengage the two retaining tabs that
se
cure the air filter access door to the HVAC
housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
ho
using. Pull the filter elements out
pinching them to the right for clearance.
Air Filter
6. I
nstall the A/C air filter with the air filter
po
sition indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
7. Close A/C air filter access door and secure
re
taining tabs.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7
background
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position, ensuring you have properly
engaged the travel damper.
Travel Dampener
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in
“Sc
heduled Servicing” in this chapter for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors, and hood hinges should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit. After lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twi
ce a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant, directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
per
iods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
d
ep
ending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines, or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
ins
pected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
rep
lace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
ar
m, press the release tab on the wiper
blade, and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. W
ith the wiper blade disengaged, remove
th
e wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
In
stalling The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wi
per arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
th
e tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
th
e opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
th
e wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exh
aust system, or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
7
background
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the
cat
alytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
sys
tems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
sug
gest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifi
-
cations, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
dam
age:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the
transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device, may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
fre
ezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
bri
ttle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coo
lant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
con
tains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for
the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different
and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automat-
ically and may start at any time, whether
the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
background
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000
miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
red
ucing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
usi
ng Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Tec
hnology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or
deionized water, when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local
authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene
glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow
it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine in the OFF mode and
cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze)
in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so
there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
nee
ded to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kil
ometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart
-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rai
n, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther
-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
sho
ws no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the freezing point of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the radiator and in the coolant
expansion bottle. If determined that more
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be
added to the radiator, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
background
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
additions are required, the cooling system
should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(co
nforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum
components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type
thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure
to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Spe
cifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling
point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected, inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch
(3 m m) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and
s
up
ported by the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
level specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of
the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended manual
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fill Hole
2 — Drain Hole
7
background
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of
an inch (4.76
mm) below the bottom of the
hol
e.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
lev
el.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in
“Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
tra
nsmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
req
uired. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and
D
ef
initions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter “P” is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
7
background
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." =
Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T
or S = Temporary spare tire, or
31 =
Overall diameter in inches (in)
21
5, 235, 145 =
Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R
= Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Se
rvice Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load –
Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
7
background
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9
= Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 =
Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
inc
luding the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
dri
ven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
min
imum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
f
or
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
p
la
card.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
t
he
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
7
background
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
abo
ut the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
th
e vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3.
Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4.
Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
re
ar, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gro ss axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loa
ding, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight
o
f
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver
and
passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amo
unt of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage
and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
fro
m your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
7
background
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
r
es
istance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
a
bn
ormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
com
fortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
alw
ays “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km)
aft
er sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wid
e range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
cha
nge. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C),
and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C),
then the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
thi
s normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading, and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
rep
aired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and
additional information.
If equipped with Run Flat tires, and they are
dam
aged, or experience a loss of pressure,
should be replaced immediately with another
Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is
not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rap
id loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
sensor, as it is not designed to be reused when
driven under run flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa)
condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
v
eh
icle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
mor
e information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30
mph (48 km/h), or for longer than 30
sec
onds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Eme
rgency” for further information.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph
(12
0 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
7
background
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6
mm). When the tread is worn to the
tre
ad wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
fur
ther information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure — Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30
mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
con
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
whe
n installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality, and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Ti
re Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tir
e dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
background
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware, these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C), or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
des
ignation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
that are equivalent in size and type to
t
he
original equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
tha
n what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For
spe
eds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to
ori
ginal equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice
, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
ins
tead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“St
arting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
e
qu
ipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a c
onventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50
mph
(80
km/h). Temporary use spares have
lim
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
7
background
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle, and remember to always wash when
the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
cau
sed by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, including
exc
essive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent, is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on rear tires only.
245/75R17 tire with the use of a traction
device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition are
used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30
mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
background
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in “Servicing
And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cro
ss” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade rating
assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Fed
eral safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
in tire size can cause damage to the transfer
case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
(Continued)
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
mat
erial of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
background
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21
days, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
system then disconnect both the main and
supplemental negative battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the
battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery
terminal from the post, as shown in the
image, to fully de-energize both batteries for
storage. If assistance is needed to
disconnect the battery system, see your
authorized dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may
not function for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS
being set into learn mode.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather, and other extreme conditions will have
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
wil
l enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
the
refore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
len
ses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
sol
vents, steel wool, or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clean water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax, to remove road film and
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the
undercarriage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials, such as steel wool or scouring
powder, that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
background
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
damage interior trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,
always make sure it is completely dry before
lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for “Care
of Fabric Top Windows” in this section.
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent,
or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush
with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required,
use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the
entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
cle
aner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before
lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they
can damage the top material. Also,
increased water pressure may force past
the weather strips.
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals
may cause water to leak into the vehicle's
interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
veh
icle's interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
(Continued)
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
windows that can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust.
Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
water, and wipe across the window, not up
and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all the
plastic windows without scratching. It
removes fine scratches to improve visibility
and provides UV protection to help prevent
yellowing.
When washing, never use hot water or
anything stronger than a mild soap. Never
use solvents such as alcohol or harsh
cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then
wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean
cloth.
When removing frost, snow, or ice, never use
a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm
water only if you must clean the window
quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
retainer operation. Even normal on-road
driving and vehicle washing will eventually
impact window plastic retainer operation. To
maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
Clean them with a mild soap solution and a
small brush. Cleaning products are available
through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
INTERIORS
Carpet Safety Information
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use carpet that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate
the vehicle when the carpet is securely
attached by the grommets so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in
place the floor may become hot, and there
is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or damaged grommets may cause your
carpet to interfere with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of
vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the carpet and
may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
7
background
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Carpet Removal
Front Carpets:
1. Remove the front grommets.
Fr
ont Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Fr
ont Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.
Fi
rst for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If the carpet needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved carpet for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check that the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Grommets
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge
and slide the carpet to the front (do not
remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat
br
acket and then remove the last two grom-
mets.
6. W
hen reinstalling carpet, perform these
st
eps in reverse order, making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar,
and console, and then refasten the grom
-
mets.
Rear Carpet
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(o
ne left and one right).
Carpet Split
2. T
hen pull the carpet out, to the rear and
op
en the carpet split around the front seat
brackets.
3. Remove the rear Under Seat storage bin (if
eq
uipped), by removing the four bolts that
hold it to the floor.
4. Remove the fastener bin from the rear floor,
it
is held in by clips.
5. Remove the jack and tools by turning the
wi
ng bolt counterclockwise, remove the
wing bolt and then lift the assembly out
from under the seat.
6. Lift carpet off of the rear retainers (one left
an
d one right).
Rear Retainers
7. Remove carpet from the vehicle.
8.
When reinstalling the carpet, perform these
st
eps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar,
console, and then refasten the grommets.
1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommet
7
background
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or
if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
so
lution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand
sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or
decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
background
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
s
ho
w any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom
-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner
app
lied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
clea
ner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
7
background
354
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the A pillar, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.
e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Soc ket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(17
6 N·m)
M14 x
1.5 0 mm
22 mm
background
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
eac
h nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
tor
que to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
exc
ellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Pr
emium” gasoline will not provide any benefit
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
num
ber of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
background
356 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are specif
-
ically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
imp
rove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
rec
ommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
d
et
ergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
age
nts should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
con
taining more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-8
5 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
background
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 357
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal law and
California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
con
trol system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine, certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the
catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice
a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for
service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the
use of such fuels or additives is not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
8
background
358 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
*Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
A
dd itive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Mat
erial Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
background
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 359
(Continued)
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
background
360 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to
u
se the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front Axles)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5)
Axle Differential (Rear M200 Sales Code DRZ)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140) (API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5). Models
e
qu
ipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
background
361
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
pur
poses only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
sec
urity features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
you
r vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
9
background
362 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may
contact you directly regarding software
updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
a
va
ilable Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unl
awfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection &
Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and
/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
tur
n off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Men
u or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button to display the settings
men
u screen. In this mode, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
background
MULTIMEDIA 363
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a t
ime.
When making a selection, press the button on
the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is selected, press the Back
Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow Buttons on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
i
n
the ON/RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be
fou
nd within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
9
background
364 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the Instrument Cluster Display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format
12 hr 24 hr
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
By selecting On/Off, this setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS.
background
MULTIMEDIA 365
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
t
en
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines On Off
9
background
366 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning
Sen
sitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
tha
n 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume - If
E
qu
ipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equ
ipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
mis
aligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist On Off
Tire Fill Assist
background
MULTIMEDIA 367
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach + -
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
l
aw
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
9
background
368 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the driver's door is opened when the transmission is in the PARK
or
NEUTRAL position.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button
t
wi
ce to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automat-
ically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Setting Name
Selectable Options
background
MULTIMEDIA 369
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(
4.
4°C).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Doors On Key Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay + -
9
background
370 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
o
r
by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
B
ut
ton
Down Arrow
But ton
Left Arrow
But ton
Right Arrow
But ton
Center C Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
fro
nt/rear or right/left side speakers. Press the C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
background
MULTIMEDIA 371
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in “Uconnect 3 with
5
-i
nch display” section.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
background
372 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
s
ca
nning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free
ser
vices, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
on
line.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings To Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
background
MULTIMEDIA 373
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen
And Faceplate Buttons
Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or
pre
ss the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
t
he
menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
selected, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up
or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
fou
nd within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display
radio, along with the selectable options
pertaining to each setting.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
background
374 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Francais
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights On + -
Display Brightness Headlights Off + -
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Auto-Show Smartphone Display Upon Connection On Off
Control Screen Timeout - If Equipped On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
background
MULTIMEDIA 375
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera — If Equipped
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
1
0
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera On Off
9
background
376 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of
the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates
the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Front Camera Gridlines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ Off Forward Facing Camera
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only
Warning &
Bra
king
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
t
ha
n 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
background
MULTIMEDIA 377
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
m
is
aligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of
the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates
the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Front Camera Gridlines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ Off Forward Facing Camera
Hill Start Assist On Off
Tire Fill Assist
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
background
378 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach + -
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
l
aw
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
background
MULTIMEDIA 379
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
d
ri
ver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button
t
wi
ce to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry - If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automat-
ically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
9
background
380 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
background
MULTIMEDIA 381
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance & Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance & Fade of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
o
r
by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+ -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness Yes No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped On Off
9
background
382 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation”
i
n
the “Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
background
MULTIMEDIA 383
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would
l
ik
e to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free
ser
vices, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
on
line.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings To Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
9
background
384 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate
Buttons
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode,
t
he
Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
selected, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up
or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
fou
nd within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
background
MULTIMEDIA 385
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
i
nc
luding the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired
language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights On + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"
pa
rty" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights Off On Off
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the
"party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme Set Theme
9
background
386 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then
sele
ct the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
fea
ture deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Auto Launch with Off Road + Off Forward Camera Off Road
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster
dis
play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
background
MULTIMEDIA 387
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Speed” (MPH, km/h), “Distance” (mi, km) “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100km, or km/L],
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always w/Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
9
background
388 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
1
0
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the
width of the vehicle and its projected back up path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines On Off
Auto Launch Off Road+ — If Equipped Off Forward Facing Camera Off Road Pages
background
MULTIMEDIA 389
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Automatic Emergency Braking — If Equipped Selectable Options
NOTE:
Forward Collision Warning (if equipped) and Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity (if equipped) are selectable options once this setting is selected.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only
Warning +
A
ct
ive Braking
Forward Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
t
ha
n 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
m
i
s
aligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Hill Start Assist On Off
9
background
390 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlights with Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
l
aw
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
background
MULTIMEDIA 391
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, and the driver's door is opened when the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
9
background
392 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You
must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks,
all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors
will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
you
r selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(
4.
4°C).
background
MULTIMEDIA 393
AUX Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4
Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Key Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
9
background
394 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons or by selecting any
p
oin
t on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change
the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
background
MULTIMEDIA 395
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect
O
wner
’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would
l
ike
to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
9
Yes
No
background
396 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the expiration of the free
ser
vices, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
on
line.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Apps — If Equipped Back Next
NOTE:
Restoring Apps will delete all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or installing apps. To restore apps, press the Next button
i
n
the pop-up screen, and then press “Yes” on the confirmation screen. To keep installed apps, press “Cancel.”
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
background
MULTIMEDIA 397
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doi
ng so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
pre
cautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software Licenses
Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio.
Map Update — If Equipped
Download System Information To
U
SB
G
enerate Request Code
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. “Generate Request Code” will display a
cod
e for the user to input online when downloading the maps.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
background
398 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated
electronic device. Do not let young children
use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of
moisture away from the system. Besides
damage to the system, moisture can cause
electric shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
u
se
some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
g
ui
delines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
R
ad
io Mode. The different tuner modes; FM/
AM/SXM (if equipped), can be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the
touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2 — COMPASS
Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to
d
is
play the current direction of the vehicle.
3 — SETTINGS
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to
d
is
play the customer programmable features.
background
MULTIMEDIA 399
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
acc
ess additional options.
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
h
ig
hlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a
list or tune to a radio station.
6 — SCREEN OFF
Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the
tou
chscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back
on, press the screen.
7 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of
the
radio system. Press it again to turn the
audio back on.
8 — VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume.
Pus
h the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system ON or OFF.
9 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to
acc
ess the Uconnect Phone feature.
10 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allo
w you to switch to Media mode: CD (if
equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®.
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to
ent
er the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, FM/AM/SXM (if equipped), can then be
selected by pressing the corresponding buttons
on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.
VOLUME/POWER Knob
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to
adjust the Volume. When the audio system is
turned on, the sound will be set at the same
volume level as last played.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
sys
tem on or off.
MUTE Button
Push the MUTE button to mute the system.
Push the MUTE button again to unmute the
system.
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
1 — Station Presets
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio
5 — Info
6 — Tune
7 — AM/FM/SXM
8 — Seek Down
9
background
400 MULTIMEDIA
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches
the
starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
tou
chscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
rea
ches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
t
ou
chscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune Functions
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to
directly tune to a specific radio station. A
keypad will appear. On the keypad, enter in your
desired radio station, and the system will
automatically tune to it.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio,
and
enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear
commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. Get all the premium
programming, including Howard Stern, every
NFL® game, every MLB®, every NHL® game,
every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart, Oprah
Radio, and more. Get 20+ extra channels,
including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20
channels of commercial-free music, news, talk,
comedy, sports, and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
sep
arately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. Our
s
at
ellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also
available in Puerto Rico (with coverage
limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area
and in Alaska and Hawai. © 2019 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equ
ipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
background
MULTIMEDIA 401
satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside
with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may
nee
d to change the vehicle’s position to receive
a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does
not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes
and are activated by pressing any of the four
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to
commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Rad
io modes. Four presets are visible at the top
of the radio screen.
Audio Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side
of the radio faceplate. If the settings button
is not present, push the MORE button on
the faceplate, then the Settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on
th
e touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following
op
tions for you to customize your audio
settings:
Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on
the touchscreen to select between ON or
OFF. This feature determines if music
automatically starts playing from a device
when it is first connected to the Media
hub’s USB port.
Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on
the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid
and Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to
your desired settings. Press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen when
done.
Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound from the speakers. Use the arrow
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound level from the front and rear or
right and left side speakers. Press the
Center C button on the touchscreen to
reset the balance and fade to the factory
setting. Press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed
Adjusted Volume button on the touch-
screen to select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3.
T
hi
s will decrease the radio volume rela-
tive to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press
t
he
Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen when done.
Loudness — Press the Loudness button
on the touchscreen to select the Loud-
ness feature. When this feature is acti-
vated, it improves sound quality at lower
v
ol
umes.
Clock Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the face-
plate, or push the MORE button on the
fac
eplate, and then the SETTINGS button
on the touchscreen.
2. Select the Clock and Date button on the
to
uchscreen.
3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.
4.
Select Set Date to change the date.
9
background
402 MULTIMEDIA
5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek
Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs
vs 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time
Zones” (if equipped).
6. Select the Done button when complete.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
but
ton located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode
button on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped),
USB, AUX and Bluetooth® (if equipped), are the
Media sources available. When available, you
can select the Browse button on the
touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Inf
o button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the track is within the
first few seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
tou
chscreen and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to
scroll through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the Browse function.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
background
MULTIMEDIA 403
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat,
press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a
second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® or
Bluetooth® device in random order to provide
an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to
turn this feature off.
Track Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
X button on the touchscreen to cancel this
feature.
Audio
Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable
audio settings.
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located on
the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen, and select
the USB/iPod® button.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the
U
SB
Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with
the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/
iPod® mode and begin to play when you insert
the device. The display will show the track
number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
sele
ct Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or
Folders from the USB/iPod® device. Once the
desired selection is made you can chose from
the available media by pressing the button on
the touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be
paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Phone Mode” section for pairing
pro
cedure.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uco
nnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen
and select the Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
i
ns
tructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack
int
o the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen, and select the AUX button.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
A
UX
Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode
and begin to play when you insert the device
cable.
9
background
404 MULTIMEDIA
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
sele
cting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the
attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
out
put from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Phone Mode
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
han
ds-free, in-vehicle communications system
with voice command capability. Refer to “Voice
Recognition (VR) Quick Tips”
within this publication for further information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
num
ber with your mobile phone using simple
voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equ
ipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility,
please visit
UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com or call 1-800-465-2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to
activate the Phone mode.
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Phone Signal Strength
3 — Paired Phone
4 — Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
background
MULTIMEDIA 405
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers using the graphic
keypad on the display.
Display and call the contacts in the mobile
phone phonebook.
Display and call contacts from the Recent
Calls menu.
Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make
access and connection easier and quicker.
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile
phone and vice versa.
Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through
the
vehicle’s audio system. The system
automatically mutes the radio when the Phone
function is used.
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile Phone
Or Bluetooth® Device
Pairing A Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pai
r your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
ref
erence your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
po
sition.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
to
oth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
9
background
406 MULTIMEDIA
If No is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings but-
ton from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select the Paired Phones button, and
then press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
sc
reen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uc
onnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
ac
cept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
co
mpleted, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting the Yes button will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone
will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when
entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone
and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be
connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If the No button is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the Blue
-
tooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
U
co
nnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
r
ep
eat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must
ma
k
e sure you have stored the names you want
to contact in the phonebook on your mobile
phone, so you can call them using the vehicle's
hands-free system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names,
ent
er new names for the most frequently used
numbers.
For further details, consult your mobile phone
own
er's handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not
c
on
tain phone numbers or where both fields
(name and surname) are empty will not be
displayed.
Connection
The system connects automatically to the
pai
red mobile phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or
Blu
etooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2.
Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3.
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
li
st using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bl
uetooth® device).
background
MULTIMEDIA 407
5. Press the Connect button.
6. During the connection stage, a screen is
di
splayed showing the progress of the oper-
ation.
7. T
he device connected is highlighted in the
li
st.
Disconnection
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or
Blu
etooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2.
Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3.
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
li
st using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bl
uetooth® device).
5. Press the Disconnect button.
Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device
To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device from a list, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2.
Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3.
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
li
st using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the device (mobile phone or Blue-
to
oth® device).
5. Press the Delete Device button.
6.
A confirmation screen will appear on the
di
splay:
Press the Yes button to delete the device.
Press the No button to cancel the opera-
tion.
Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device As A Favorite
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device as a favorite, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2.
Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3.
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
li
st using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bl
uetooth® device).
5. Press the Make Favorite button.
6.
The device selected is moved to the top of
th
e list.
Downloading A Phonebook From Your Mobile
Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. See
UconnectPhone.com for supported
phones.
If equipped and specifically supported by your
pho
ne, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature.
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update
begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
9
background
408 MULTIMEDIA
phone connection is made to the Uconnect
Phone. For example, after you start the
vehicle. You may be asked for permission to
initiate the phonebook download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is
downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not part
of the mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And
Recent Calls)
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to
delete the list of recent calls and the phonebook
copy.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The
"Keyboard" Icon On The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic
key
pad displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
us
e the number buttons to enter the
number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Ca
ll By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone
Num
ber
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wh
eel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full
na
me or phone number).
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the
foll
owing call types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent
Call
s button on the Phone menu main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Pro
gress
When a phone conversation is active, a second
pho
ne call can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of
recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number
using the graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made,
p
re
ss the Redial button.
background
MULTIMEDIA 409
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following
pho
ne call functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call
Cur
rently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the
Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A
Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the
Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel to answer the call and put
the ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones may support the manage-
ment of an incoming call when another phone
c
on
versation is active.
Managing Two Phone Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), it is possible to switch between them
pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the
two calls in a conference pressing the Merge
Calls button.
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use
s
up
ports the management of a second call and
the "Conference" mode.
Transferring/Call Continuation
Transferring
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the
mob
ile phone to the system and vice versa
without ending the call.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
Call Continuation
After the engine is switched off, it is still possible
t
o
continue a phone call.
The call continues until it is ended manually or
for
a maximum period of about 20 minutes.
When the system is switched off, the call is
tra
nsferred to the mobile phone.
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
end a call in progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on
hol
d becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
ong
oing call is ended by the caller, the call on
hold may not be activated automatically.
9
background
410 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone Features
Mute/Unmute
1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND
bu
tton on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
Re
ading Messages
The system can read the messages received by
t
he
mobile phone.
To use this function, the mobile phone must
sup
port the SMS exchange function via
Bluetooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone,
the
corresponding message button is
deactivated (greyed out) or may only accept
incoming messages.
When a text message is received, the display
wil
l show a screen where the options "Listen",
"Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.
Press the Message button to access the list of
SMS
messages received by the mobile phone.
The list displays a maximum of 60
messages
rec
eived.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
vie
w and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
pan
el menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10
SMS
messages to be displayed.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
pur
poses only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. R
adio
Pr
ess the Radio button on the touchscreen
to
enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
background
MULTIMEDIA 411
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to
access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. C
limate
Re
fer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Kno
w Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Pr
ess the Apps button on the touchscreen
to
access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
5. C
ontrols
Pr
ess the Controls button on the touch-
screen to adjust the heated and vented
sea
ts or heated steering wheel (if
equipped).
6. Phone
Pr
ess the Phone button on the touchscreen
to
access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Pr
ess the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
men
u.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps b
utton to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to
replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
ont
o the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PAR
K.
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bot
tom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
t
he
screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns contin-
uously (360 degrees) in either direction, without
9
background
412 MULTIMEDIA
stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control
knob clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
wil
l be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
cloc
kwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
pro
vides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
t
ou
chscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
tou
chscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
tou
chscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
loc
ated at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is
available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and
can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
tou
chscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bot
tom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
e
nt
ered, press the OK button, and the Direct
Tune screen will close. The system will automat
-
ically tune to that station.
background
MULTIMEDIA 413
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to
commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Rad
io modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by
pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
pro
vides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scr
oll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
l
is
ted Presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
sto
red in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
scr
een by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pre
ssing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio-equipped vehicles come with a
one
-year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more
information
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
sep
arately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
9
background
414 MULTIMEDIA
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automat-
ically renew and bill at then-current rates until
y
ou
call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. All fees
and programming subject to change. Our
sat
ellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK. © 2019
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
e
qu
ipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
hav
e to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
req
uire a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
s
ub
scription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-877-438-9677
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
l
oc
ated at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is
highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Dir
ect Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
com
mon to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
background
MULTIMEDIA 415
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and
replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 m
inutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
swi
tched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
pla
y/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the
touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
tou
chscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play
button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
r
ew
ind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
f
or
wards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done when
the content is previously rewound, and therefore,
can not be done for live content. A continuous
press of the FW button on the touchscreen also
forwards the content. The Radio begins playing
the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
r
es
ume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to
act
ivate the favorites menu, which will time out
in five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the
X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
art
ist, or song that is currently playing. The Radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite song, or favorite artist are being played
at any time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
sto
red in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Fa
vorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Fa
vorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edi
t Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exi
t a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Scr
een.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
t
he
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
9
background
416 MULTIMEDIA
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
dis
play a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
t
he
Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and
down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
lis
ted Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
scr
een by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the
Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the
Fav
orites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
scr
een. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
s
cr
een. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
o
f
the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-
Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the
t
ou
chscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
scr
een. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or
press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
s
cr
een. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
background
MULTIMEDIA 417
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
t
he
Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu, to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Surround Sound (if equipped),
Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and
Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the
X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the
t
ou
chscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or
press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to
activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dra
gging over the level bar for each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
9
background
418 MULTIMEDIA
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
t
ou
chscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
sele
cting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
a
ct
ivate Surround Sound. Press Off to
deactivate this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear
aud
io coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
act
ivate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at
low
er volumes improves.
background
MULTIMEDIA 419
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
t
ou
chscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of
the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
t
o
activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off
. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
t
ou
chscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when
act
ivated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
9
background
420 MULTIMEDIA
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a U
SB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
P
ress and release the Seek Up button on the
tou
chscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
d
is
play the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
sele
ct the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
t
og
gle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
p
la
y the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
dis
play the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
d
is
play a pop up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
whi
le the pop up is displayed will close the pop
up.
Audio
Refer to “Radio Mode” for adjusting the audio
set
tings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jac
k into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
background
MULTIMEDIA 421
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
s
ele
cting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
out
put from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
sele
ct the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to “Radio Mode” for adjusting the audio
s
et
tings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Blu
etooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Pho
ne section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Sou
rce button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the
Blu
etooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down
button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
sele
ct the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
p
re
ss the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
whi
le the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to “Radio Mode” for adjusting the audio
set
tings.
9
background
422 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mob
ile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
sys
tem, and your Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To
use Android Auto™, follow the following
procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Go
ogle Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smart-
ph
one to one of the media USB ports in your
veh
icle. If the Android Auto™ app was not
downloaded, the first time you plug your
device in, the app will begin to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
tha
t came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™
3. O
nce the device is connected and recog-
ni
zed, the “Phone” icon on the drag & drop
men
u bar changes to the Android Auto™
Icon. Android Auto™ should launch, but if it
does not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple
CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for
the procedure to enable the feature “Auto
-
Show”. You can also launch it by touching
t
he
Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uco
nnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Handsfree Calling and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
background
MULTIMEDIA 423
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
are
a with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
Signal Strength
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
And
roid™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
w
he
el or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
t
he
built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
pro
vides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/
/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation
fun
ction, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
y
ou
r favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
9
background
424 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up
on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Music
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
t
hr
ough Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the
VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Contacts
Call In Progress
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
com
patible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
m
ob
ile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
Car
Play®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
usi
ng iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
background
MULTIMEDIA 425
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
US
B ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
c
ab
le that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. O
nce the device is connected and recog-
ni
zed, the “Phone” icon on the drag & drop
men
u bar changes to the Apple CarPlay®
Icon. Apple CarPlay® should launch, but if
not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple
CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for
the procedure to enable the feature “Auto
-
Show”. You can also touch the Apple
C
ar
Play® icon on the touchscreen to
launch it.
Apple CarPlay®
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
U
co
nnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
dat
a is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
p
ho
ne compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis
-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
ter
ms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR
but
ton on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
9
background
426 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
ste
ering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
art
ists, playlists, and music from iTunes®.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to
use
Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri
can also read incoming text messages, but
driver’s will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple® Maps for navigation on your
Uco
nnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and
push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category,
by launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and
is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
T
ri
cks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
t
ha
t automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
background
MULTIMEDIA 427
NOTE:
AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.
AutoShow
AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system
tha
t automatically launches and displays
Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® when the
phone is initially connected to the USB media
port. This feature can be turned on and off in
the Uconnect Settings, within the Display
Settings category. The default setting is on.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
tim
e and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Blu
etooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
Sys
tem
It is possible to have multiple devices
con
nected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
9
background
428 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
han
ds-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
fea
tures:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one
of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
View call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed
Calls,” “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
thr
oughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from
phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Glob
al System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobi
le phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Ac-
cess Profile (MAP) profile]
background
MULTIMEDIA 429
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
thr
ough your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
bet
ween the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Blu
etooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect
Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to
the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
whe
el is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
s
te
ering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to
access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
veh
icle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uco
nnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
background
430 MULTIMEDIA
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
sy
stem to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
N
at
ural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
com
mands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phr
ase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
sys
tem requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
wan t to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
sim
ply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Ca
ncel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
but
ton (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pai
r your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
background
MULTIMEDIA 431
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
ref
erence your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2.
Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
th
e touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
t
he
system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
to
oth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
p
ai
r a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-
tings button from the Uconnect Phone main
s
cr
een.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
sc
reen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uc
onnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
ac
cept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the
PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
co
mpleted, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will recon
-
nect to the Bluetooth® device.
9
background
432 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uco
nnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
r
ep
eat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
to
uchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
sc
reen.
3. Search for available devices on your Blue-
to
oth®-enabled mobile phone. When
pro
mpted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
sc
reen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
co
mpleted, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
pho
ne priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bri
ng up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. P
ress the Media button on the touch-
sc
reen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3.
Press the Bluetooth® button on the touch-
sc
reen to display the Paired Audio Devices
scr
een.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
sc
reen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
t
he
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Blue-
to
oth®-enabled audio device. When
pro
mpted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
sc
reen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
co
mpleted, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
background
MULTIMEDIA 433
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
dev
ice priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bri
ng up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Aud
io Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
to
uchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
So
urces button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
pa
rticular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
sc
reen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
to
uchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
De
vices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
ri
ght of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5.
Press the Disconnect Device button on the
to
uchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
sc
reen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
to
uchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
De
vices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
ri
ght of the device name for a different
Phone or Audio Device than the currently
connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5.
Press the Delete Device button on the
to
uchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
sc
reen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
to
uchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
De
vices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
ri
ght of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5.
Press the Make Favorite button on the
to
uchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
sc
reen.
9
background
434 MULTIMEDIA
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
pho
ne, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Fav
orites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
th
e Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Co
ntacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the down arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favor
-
ites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
r
em
ove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
fr
om the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
co
ntact you want to remove from your favor-
ites. This will bring up the options for that
f
av
orite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
background
MULTIMEDIA 435
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
pho
ne call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. P
ush the VR button on your steering wheel
to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
fo
llowing beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
15
1-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
fo
llowing beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
as
sociated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
f
oll
owing call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
sc
reen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3.
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4.
Use the numbered buttons on the touch-
sc
reens to enter the number and press Call.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
s
te
ering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
9
background
436 MULTIMEDIA
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
ste
ering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Re
cent”, or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Cur
rently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Cur
rently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
ano
ther incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID
box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
mar
ket today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you
to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
tex
t message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
t
ou
chscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
sele
cted so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
t
he
Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Pro
gress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hol
d button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
background
MULTIMEDIA 437
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on
hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
bet
ween the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one
on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Pho
ne End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
pus
h the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
tha
t was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
c
all
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
sys
tem until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom
-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
tou
chscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
vie
w and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
pan
el menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10
SMS
messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
tra
nsferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uco
nnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Blu
etooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
9
background
438 MULTIMEDIA
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
lan
guages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name
rec
ognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
num
ber combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
lou
dness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
background
MULTIMEDIA 439
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose
con
nection to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
ei
t
her the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
information relating to the vehicle ride height,
the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle (if equipped).
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
but
ton on the touchscreen, and then select
Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages Status Bar
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the three selectable page options. It
provides information for the following items:
Transfer Case Status
Latitude/Longitude
Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Selec-Speed Control and Selected
Speed in MPH (km/h)
1 — Off-Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
9
background
440 MULTIMEDIA
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
Pitch & Roll
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll
gauge provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
Drivetrain
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Offroad+ Status
3 — Latitude/Longitude
4 — Altitude
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
background
MULTIMEDIA 441
Accessory Gauge
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only),
Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
wit
h a push-button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
swi
tch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/USB/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a p
ush-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
ope
ration in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
con
trol will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic Trans-
mission Only)
9
background
442 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the
lef
t rocker switch is nonfunctional.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. Behind the
media hub access door, the Media Hub
contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and
one standard USB Port. Both USB Ports allow
you to play music from MP3 players/
smartphones or USB devices through the
vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
“Media Mode” in “Uconnect 4 with 7-inch
Display” section or in the Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to
you
r device up to an hour after the vehicle is
turned off.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time and both ports will provide charging
capabilities. Only one port can transfer data
to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear
and allow you to select the device
transferring data.
Both ports share a single data connection.
The user cannot switch between Type A or
Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A U
SB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
USB Connection
Media Hub
1 — Type A Plugged In
2 — Type C Plugged In
3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
background
MULTIMEDIA 443
Located inside the center console, a second
USB Port allows you to play music from iPod®/
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
Center Console USB
A third and fourth USB port (if equipped) are
l
oc
ated behind the center console, above the
power inverter. One is a charge only port, and
can only charge USB devices. The other USB
Port allows you to play music from iPod®/MP3
players or USB devices through your vehicle’s
sound system.
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged
int
o the USB ports, the following message will
display depending on the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Jeep Wireless Speaker - If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless
Bluetooth® speaker.
Getting To Know Your Speaker
Speaker Buttons
1 - Type C And Standard USB USB Ports
2 - Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or
external device while driving. Failure to follow
this warning could result in a collision.
1 — Power ON/OFF 4 — Volume Down/Skip
Bac k
2 — Bluetooth®/App
Pai
ring
5 — Voice Control/Call
Cont rol
3 — Play/Pause 6 — Volume Up/Skip
Forw
ard
9
background
444 MULTIMEDIA
Rear Speaker Outlets
Jeep Wireless Speaker Location
Wireless Speaker Location
The Jeep wireless speaker is located behind the
rig
ht rear passenger seat. In order to access the
Jeep wireless speaker, the seat will need to be
folded down or tilted forward.
To remove the Jeep wireless speaker, pull on
the
strap located on top of the mount for the
speaker. When the strap is pulled, the Jeep
wireless speaker can easily be lifted from the
mount.
When placing the Jeep wireless speaker back in
the
mount, simply put the speaker back in the
mount and push/rotate forward on the front of
the speaker until the speaker locks in place.
Charging External Devices
The Jeep wireless speaker is capable of
charging most USB enabled smartphones and
tablets using the type A USB charging port.
To use the external charging feature:
1. Turn the speaker on.
2.
Plug the USB power cable into the type A
US
B charging port on the back of the
speaker.
3. Insert the other end of the USB power cable
in
to your device to immediately begin
charging.
1 — Reset Button 5 — Battery Status LED
2 — Battery Status
Button
6 — Speaker Charging
Port
3 — Service/Diagnostic
Port
(Non-charging,
Non-customer use port)
7 — Aux Port
4 — Type A USB
Cha
rging Port
background
MULTIMEDIA 445
Charging The Speaker
Before using the Jeep wireless speaker for the
first time, fully charge your Jeep wireless
speaker until the battery indicator light stays
solid green.
The Jeep wireless speaker in-vehicle dock is the
mos
t ideal way to fully charge the speaker with
the ignition in ON/RUN or ACC. The speaker can
also be charged with a power adapter.
NOTE:
Jeep wireless speaker will not charge within
veh
icle dock while the ignition is fully off.
To charge the Jeep wireless speaker with a
pow
er adapter, insert the power adapter into a
wall outlet. Next, plug the power adapter into
the Jeep wireless speaker charging port on the
back of the speaker.
NOTE:
Power adapter needed for the Jeep wireless
s
pe
aker has to have a range of 14VDC to
16.5VDC, with a minimum of 2.7A and a barrel
connector dimension of 5.5mm by 2.5mm.
Power adapter is not included.
NOTE:
The Jeep wireless speaker must be turned on to
o
bs
erve the Battery Status LED.
Operating Temperature
Monitoring Battery Level Status LED
Light
Red 40% or lower
Yellow 40% to 70%
Green 70% to 100%
Temperature
<-4°F
(< -20°C)
-4 to 32°F
(< -20 to 0°C)
32 to 113°F
(0 to 45°C)
115 to 140°F
(46 to 60°C)
>140°F
(>6 0°C)
Speaker state (docked or Direct Current
[DC] plugged in)
Off On On On Off
Speaker state (undocked and running off
bat
tery)
Off On On On Off
Speaker’s Internal Battery Charging No No Yes No No
9
background
446 MULTIMEDIA
The Jeep wireless speaker contains a
lithium-ion rechargeable battery. Typical
charging temperatures for these types of
batteries are from 32 to 113°F (0 to 45°C).
NOTE:
The functions described are for when the Jeep
wir
eless speaker is undocked from the vehicle.
When plugged into the docking station, the Jeep
wireless speaker functions as part of the
vehicle’s sound system.
Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing
A feature of the Jeep wireless speaker is the
ability for the Jeep wireless speaker to connect
to devices using Bluetooth®. Follow these
simple steps to connect a Bluetooth®-enabled
device to the Jeep wireless speaker:
1. Press and hold the power button for 2-3
se
conds to turn the Jeep wireless speaker
on.
2. Turn “on” Bluetooth® for the device you
de
sire to be connected to the Jeep wireless
speaker. For instructions on how to turn on
and off Bluetooth® settings for the desired
device, refer to the device’s user manual.
3. When powered on, the Jeep wireless
sp
eaker will automatically enter pairing
mode. To pair a second device, press and
hold the Bluetooth® button for 2-3
seconds, until an audio cue is heard. Then
go to the devices’ Bluetooth® settings and
select “Jeep Speaker” from the list.
The Jeep wireless speaker will remember the
las
t eight devices it has paired with.
NOTE:
If the Jeep wireless speaker is left on with an
i
na
ctive Bluetooth® connection for 30 minutes,
it
will automatically turn off. The Jeep wireless
speaker can be turned on again by pressing and
holding the power button for 2-3 seconds.
Resetting Your Jeep Wireless Speaker
To reset the Jeep wireless speaker to its original
factory setting, press and hold the reset button
under the back cover for 8-10 seconds.
Speakerphone
The speakerphone feature can be used by
pressing the “Voice Control” button on the Jeep
wireless speaker. This feature can be used to
answer and end calls over the speakerphone.
Volume And Playback Control
Volume can be increased or decreased by
briefly pressing the + button or - button. When
the maximum volume is reached, an audio cue
will sound.
To skip to the next track, press and hold the +
but
ton. To go to the previous track, press the -
button.
Qualcomm TrueWrieless™ Stereo
A feature of the Jeep wireless speaker is being
able to pair two Jeep wireless speakers together
for Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo. This
feature allows for two Jeep wireless speakers to
play left and right stereo sound.
Below are the steps needed for Qualcomm
Tru
eWireless™ Stereo:
1. Push and hold the power button on both
Je
ep wireless speakers until both speakers
turn on.
2. Place both speakers into Qualcomm True-
Wi
reless™ Stereo pairing mode. This can be
ach
ieved by pressing and holding the
Battery Status button on both speakers
until an audio notification is heard from
both speakers.
background
MULTIMEDIA 447
3. Connect one of the Jeep wireless speakers
to the Bluetooth® source. Refer to previous
section “Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing” for
additional information.
4. Once the Jeep wireless speaker is
co
nnected to the Bluetooth® device, audio
will be played from both speakers.
NOTE:
While in Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo
mod
e, the volume will not have independent
speaker control. Pushing the Up or Down
Volume button on either Jeep wireless speaker
will affect the audio output on both, as well as
volume adjustments on the Bluetooth® device.
Waterproof Features
The Jeep wireless speaker is IP67 waterproof
certified with design in mind to withstand
rainfall, waterjets, splashing or submerged in
up to 3ft (1m) of water for up to 30
minutes.
Warnings, Caution & Legal Information
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose the Jeep wireless speaker to rain or
moisture while charging. The Jeep wireless
speaker should not be exposed to dripping or
splashing, and objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, should not be placed on or near it
while being charged or charging other devices.
As with any electronic products, use care not to
spill liquids into any part of the product. Liquids
can cause a failure and/or a fire hazard. The
power supply must be used indoors only. Make
no modifications to the product or accessories.
Unauthorized alterations may compromise
safety, regulatory compliance, and system
performance, and will void the warranty. Do not
place any flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on or near the Jeep wireless speaker.
The Jeep wireless speaker contains small parts
that may be a choking hazard and is not
suitable for children under age 3. Do not
continue charging the battery if it does not
reach full charge within the specified charging
time. Overcharging may cause the battery to
become hot, rupture, or ignite. If you see any
heat deformation or leakage, properly dispose
of the battery. Do not attempt to charge the
battery in temperatures outside the range of
32°- 104°F (0° - 40°C). If the battery begins to
leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact
with your skin or eyes. If contact has been
made, wash the affected area with plenty of
water and seek medical attention immediately.
Do not expose the Jeep wireless speaker or
battery to excessive heat, including direct
sunlight or fire. Do not store or use inside cars
in hot weather, where it can be exposed to
temperatures in excess of 115°F (60°C). Doing
so may cause the battery and power supply to
generate heat, rupture, or ignite. Using the Jeep
wireless speaker in this manner also may result
in a loss of performance and a shortened life
expectancy. Extended exposure to direct
sunlight may damage the external appearance
and material qualities. Do not step on, throw, or
drop batteries or the power supply or device, or
expose them to a strong shock. Do not pierce,
CAUTION!
Ensure the Jeep Wireless Speaker is
prepared for use in wet environments by
removing all cable connections and making
sure all port covers are sealed tightly. If the
cover is not secured properly, the Jeep
Wireless Speaker may sustain water damage.
9
background
448 MULTIMEDIA
crush, dent, or deform the batteries or power
supply in any way. If either becomes deformed,
properly dispose of it. Do not short-circuit
batteries. Do not attempt to service the Jeep
wireless speaker yourself. Opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages
or other hazards and will void the
manufacturer’s warranty. To prevent risk of fire
or electric shock, avoid overloading wall outlets,
extension cords, or integral convenience
receptacles. Your Bluetooth® device (mobile
phone, music player, tablet, laptop, etc.) must
support the A2DP Bluetooth® profile in order to
work wirelessly with your Jeep wireless speaker.
The A2DP profile is supported by most recent
mobile products with built-in Bluetooth®
capability. Please refer to your device’s user
manual for details and instruction regarding the
Bluetooth® profiles it supports. This device
complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Jeep follows Safety Instruction for CE- LV. Do not
ope rate products in temperatures outside the
range of -5 to 40 °C. Operating Frequency
Band: 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz Maximum RF
power: 6 dBm EIRP. Do not install this
equipment in a confined or building- in a space
such as a book case or similar unit and remain
a well ventilation conditions. The ventilation
should not be impeded by covering the
ventilation openings with items such as
newspaper, table-cloths, curtains etc.
NOTE:
Please refer to the information on the bottom of
the
Jeep wireless speaker for electrical and
safety information before installing or operating
the Jeep wireless speaker.
Directive 2014/53/EU Article 10 Obligations of
Man
ufacturers
2. Manufacturers shall ensure that radio
equ
ipment shall be so constructed that it can
be operated in at least one Member State
without infringing applicable requirements on
the use of radio spectrum.
10. In cases of restrictions on putting in to
ser
vice or of requirements for authorization of
use, information available on the packaging
shall allow the identification of the Member
States or the geographical area within a
Member State where restrictions on putting into
service or requirements for authorization of use
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, shall not be
placed on apparatus.
WARNING!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type. If the battery or battery pack
is exposed to excessive heat or fire, personal
injury may occur.
CAUTION!
If needed, Jeep wireless speaker should be
cleaned using a damp cloth and water. Do not
use alkaline products like soap or abrasive
chemicals to clean the Jeep wireless speaker
as it could cause damage to it.
background
MULTIMEDIA 449
exist. The Commission may adopt implementing
acts specifying how to present that information.
Those implementing acts shall be adopted in
accordance with the advisory procedure
referred to in Article 45 (2).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
reg
istered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by FCA US LLC is
under license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective owners.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
w
ir
eless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8
in (20 cm) or further from the
hum
an body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
gui
delines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wir
eless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Rad
io Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rul
es and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
en
ce.
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
la
ge, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
9
background
450 MULTIMEDIA
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
eq
uipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
ri
enced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
background
MULTIMEDIA 451
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
fin
d phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
pa
ssenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
wh
ile facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned in the middle console
a
bo
ve the rearview mirror and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
mu
st first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
sy
stem prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media
Functions. For 8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Be-
gin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
9
background
452 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voi
ce recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen for Uconnect 3 radio and
above the main menu bar for Uconnect 4C/4C
Nav radios.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
wan
t to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say “Help”.
The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the
beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist/album/song/genre.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to iPod®”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse b
utton on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your iPod® or USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready to make a phone call. You may
have to wait for a few more moments to issue a
Voice Command for hands-free calling. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compat-
ibility and pairing instructions (for US and
Can
adian residents).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel or Phone
but
ton . After the beep, say one of the following
commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
background
MULTIMEDIA 453
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
but
ton on the steering wheel or Phone button
and say “Call”,
then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can
say “Call John Smith work/home/cell/etc.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled) and say “Li
st
en”. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system).
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
yo
u, push the VR button
or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Rep
ly
”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
be
ep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Mes
sage Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
inc
oming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
User Manual.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
i
Ph
one®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate — If Equipped
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for climate may only be used to
adj
ust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel (if equipped).
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
tra
ffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you
?
I will be
<nu
mber>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet
?
I’ll call you
lat
er.
I need
dir ections.
See you in
<nu
mber>
minutes.
I’m on my
way
.
Can’t talk
rig
ht now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
9
background
454 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when the
system shows you exactly how to get to where
you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
on
the steering wheel. After the beep, say:
“
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan” or enter State.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TI
P:
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push
t
he
VR button . After the beep, say: “Fin
d
nearest coffee shop”.
Siri® Eyes Free
Available on iPhone® 4s and later
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
mes
sages, schedule meetings, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses
your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your
iPh
one®. Pair your Siri-enabled device to your
Uconnect System. Push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages, and
many other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you
to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
tex
t message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
sele
cted so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mob
ile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
int
eract with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
background
MULTIMEDIA 455
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Microphone icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to “Android Auto™” in “Media Mode” in
the
“Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section or
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
And
roid™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mob
ile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
int
eract with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Refer to "Apple Carplay®" in "Media Mode" in
"Uc
onnect 4 with 7-inch Display" section or in
the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement for
further information
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
pho
ne compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis
-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
ter
ms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
background
456 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and
with Innovation, Science, and Economic
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
in
terference.
2. This device must accept any interference
re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`I
nnovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
br
ouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
br
ouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom
-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
sig
uientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
ca
use interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
qu
ier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pue
da causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
app
roved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
t
he
equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com
or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
day
s a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveU-
connect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
background
457
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
aut
horized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
aut
horized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the
manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
cus
tomer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
10
background
458 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
3
87
-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate
with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
req
uire assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
ser
vice contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
inv
estment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased
with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
background
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 459
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html for further
information.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
Mopar has a wide range of accessories to fit
you
r active lifestyle. These Accessories were
designed by the same engineers that created
your vehicle, to make it truly yours. From
winches to axles, from suspension to the LED
off–road lights, these parts have been crafted
to meet the needs of enthusiasts like you who
demand the very best in capability and style.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
ope
n an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized dealer or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Saf
ety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
B
ui
lding, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
menu.html.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
background
460 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the
information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble
-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
ser
vicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
d
ia
grams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
wit h the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
background
461
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes
......................................... 354
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
.............................................. 223
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............... 324
Adding Fuel .................................................... 250
Additives, Fuel ............................................... 356
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
...................................... 164
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 162, 165
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 175, 305
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ....................... 305
Front Air Bag ................................... 163, 165
If Deployment Occurs ................................ 174
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................ 172
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 176
Maintenance ............................................. 176
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............163
Transporting Pets ...................................... 189
Air Bag Light ........................................ 162, 190
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter)
................................................ 315
Air Conditioner Maintenance ......................... 318
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................ 318
Air Conditioner System .................................. 318
Air Conditioning ............................................... 57
Air Conditioning Filter .............................. 59, 319
Air Conditioning System ................................... 57
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 58
Air Filter ........................................................ 315
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 336
Alarm
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Security Alarm ............................................. 20
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
........................................................... 9
Android Auto ................................................. 454
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 323, 358
Disposal ................................................... 325
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 131
Apple CarPlay ................................................ 455
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 136
Audio Settings ............................................... 417
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 361
Auto Down Power Windows ............................. 60
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................... 40
Automatic Door Locks ...................................... 26
Automatic Headlights ....................................... 42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............. 57
Automatic Transmission ................................ 204
Adding Fluid .............................................. 329
Autostick ................................................... 208
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 329
Fluid Change ............................................. 329
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 328
Fluid Type ........................................ 328, 360
Gear Ranges ............................................. 205
Special Additives ...................................... 328
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 208
Aux Mode ...................................................... 420
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........97
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 97
Auxiliary Switches ......................................... 100
Axle Fluid....................................................... 360
Axle Lock ....................................................... 212
B
Battery
.......................................................... 313
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 12
Belts, Seat .................................................... 190
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 140
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Ucon
nect Phone And Mobile Phone ..... 437
11
background
462
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................ 433
Bluetooth Mode ............................................. 421
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 320
B-Pillar Location ............................................. 333
Brake Assist System ...................................... 132
Brake Control System .................................... 132
Brake Fluid .......................................... 326, 360
Brake System ...................................... 326, 354
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................................... 354
Fluid Check ............................................... 326
Master Cylinder ......................................... 326
Parking ...................................................... 198
Brake/Transmission Interlock ....................... 204
Bulb Replacement ............................... 277, 279
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 192, 277
Bumper End Cap Removal ............................. 265
C
Camera, Rear ................................................ 247
Capacities, Fluid ............................................ 358
Caps, Filler
Fuel
........................................................... 250
Oil (Engine) ................................................ 312
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...................... 324
Car Washes ................................................... 347
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 189, 357
Carpeting ....................................................... 350
Cellular Phone ............................................... 449
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 281
Certification Label ......................................... 251
Chains, Tire ................................................... 343
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 329
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 330
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 189
Checks, Safety .............................................. 189
Child Restraint .............................................. 177
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 180
Child Seat Installation .............................. 187
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 185
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 179
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 184
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 182
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 179
Seating Positions ...................................... 181
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 356
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 342
Climate Control
Automatic .................................................... 50
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 196
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 341
Connector
UCI
............................................................ 442
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......... 442
Console ..................................................... 94, 95
Floor ..................................................... 94, 95
Contract, Service .......................................... 458
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 324
Cooling System ............................................. 323
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 324
Coolant Level ............................................ 325
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 358
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 325
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 323
Inspection ........................................ 323, 325
Points To Remember ................................ 325
Pressure Cap ............................................ 324
Radiator Cap ............................................. 324
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 323, 358
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 346
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 223
Customer Assistance .................................... 457
Cybersecurity ................................................ 361
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 42
Dealer Service ............................................... 314
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 190
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 45
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
..................................................... 42
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 313
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 303
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
...................... 325
Disturb .......................................................... 436
Do Not Disturb .............................................. 454
background
463
Door Frame ..................................................... 71
Installation .................................................. 71
Removal ...................................................... 71
Door Locks
Automatic
.................................................... 26
Doors ............................................................... 21
Removal ............................................... 27, 29
Removal, Front ............................................ 27
Removal, Rear ............................................. 29
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............................. 31, 32
Driving ........................................................... 264
Dual Top .......................................................... 60
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 132
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 131
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 133, 139
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................... 41
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......... 97
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 97
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......221
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................... 133
Emergency
In Case Of
.................................................. 272
SOS Emergency Call .................................. 272
Emergency Brake .......................................... 198
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking
............................................ 289, 329
Jump Starting ............................................ 297
Tow Hooks ................................................. 304
Engine........................................................... 312
Air Cleaner ................................................ 315
Block Heater ............................................. 197
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 197
Compartment ........................................... 312
Compartment Identification ...................... 312
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 358
Cooling ..................................................... 323
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 189, 357
Fails To Start ............................................ 196
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 196
Fuel Requirements ................................... 358
Jump Starting ........................................... 297
Oil .................................................... 314, 358
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 312
Oil Filter .................................................... 315
Oil Reset ................................................... 111
Oil Selection .................................... 315, 358
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 315
Overheating .............................................. 300
Starting..................................................... 193
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 315
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ............................. 315
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 175, 305
Ethanol ......................................................... 356
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................... 189
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 357
Exhaust System ................................... 189, 321
Exterior Lights ......................................... 42, 192
F
Fabric Care
.................................................... 348
Fabric Top ..................................................... 348
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 315
Air Conditioning ................................. 59, 319
Engine Oil ........................................ 315, 358
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 315
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 272
Turn Signal ............................................... 192
Turn Signals ..................................... 279, 280
Flash-To-Pass ................................................... 42
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 196
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 358
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 192
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission ............................... 328
Fluid Level Checks ........................................ 327
Brake ........................................................ 326
Engine Oil ................................................. 313
Fluid, Brake ................................................... 360
Fluids And Lubricants .................................... 358
Fog Lights ..................................................... 280
Fog Lights, Service ........................................ 280
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 31
Folding Rear Seats ........................................... 34
Folding Windshield ........................................... 83
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 144
11
background
464
Four Wheel Drive ........................................... 209
Operation .................................................. 209
Shifting ...................................................... 209
System ...................................................... 209
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ............................... 272
Freedom Panels ....................................... 67, 68
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................. 302
Front Axle (Differential) .................................. 327
Fuel ............................................................... 355
Adding ....................................................... 250
Additives ................................................... 356
Clean Air .................................................... 356
Ethanol ...................................................... 356
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ................................... 250
Gasoline .................................................... 355
Materials Added ........................................ 356
Methanol ................................................... 356
Octane Rating ................................. 355, 358
Requirements ........................................... 358
Specifications ............................................ 358
Tank Capacity ............................................ 358
Fueling........................................................... 250
Fuses ............................................................. 281
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.................... 89
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..................... 250, 251
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 355
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 356
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................. 356
Gear Ranges ........................................ 201, 205
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 353
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 253
GVWR............................................................ 252
H
Hard Top .......................................................... 67
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 272
Head Restraints ............................................... 36
Headlights
Automatic
.................................................... 42
Bulb Replacement .................................... 279
Cleaning ................................................... 347
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 42
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 43
Passing ........................................................ 42
Replacing ................................................. 279
Heated Mirrors ................................................. 41
Heated Steering Wheel .................................... 39
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
.............................................................. 42
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 136
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 255
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................... 89
Hood Prop ........................................................ 86
Hood Release .................................................. 86
I
Ignition
............................................................. 14
Switch .......................................................... 14
In Case Of Emergency ................................... 272
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ...................................... 10
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 40
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 111
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 352
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 282
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 44
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 349
Interior Lights ................................................... 44
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................45
Inverter
Power
........................................................... 99
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................. 420
J
Jack Location
................................................ 289
Jack Operation ..................................... 292, 329
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 292
Jump Starting ................................................ 297
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
........................................... 21
Disarm The System ...................................... 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............13
background
465
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 12
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 13
Key-In Reminder .............................................. 15
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................................... 23
Passive Entry ............................................... 23
Keys................................................................. 11
Replacement ........................................ 13, 20
L
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 43
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 155
Latches.......................................................... 192
Hood ........................................................... 86
Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 192
Life Of Tires ................................................... 338
Light Bulbs........................................... 192, 277
Lights............................................................. 192
Air Bag............................................. 162, 190
Automatic Headlights .................................. 42
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 135
Bulb Replacement ..................................... 279
Center Mounted Stop ................................ 281
Daytime Running ......................................... 42
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 42
Exterior ............................................... 42, 192
Fog ............................................................ 280
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................ 272
Headlights ................................................. 279
High Beam ................................................... 42
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...................... 42
Interior......................................................... 44
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 43
Passing ........................................................ 42
Rear Servicing .......................................... 280
Rear Tail Lamps ....................................... 280
Service ..................................................... 279
Side Marker .............................................. 280
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 147
Traction Control ........................................ 135
Turn Signal ............................................... 192
Turn Signals .................................... 279, 280
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 251
Tires ......................................................... 333
Locking
Axle
........................................................... 212
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................ 26
Child Protection ........................................... 26
Power Door .................................................. 22
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 147
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 320
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 354
Luggage Carrier ............................................ 106
M
Maintenance Free Battery
............................ 313
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 306
Manual
Park Release
............................................ 301
Service...................................................... 460
Manual Transmission ........................... 199, 327
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 328
Lubricant Selection .......................... 327, 360
Shift Speeds ............................................. 201
Methanol....................................................... 356
Mirrors ............................................................. 40
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 40
Electric Powered .......................................... 41
Electric Remote ........................................... 41
Heated ......................................................... 41
Outside ........................................................ 40
Rearview ...................................................... 40
Vanity........................................................... 41
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................... 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 147
Mopar Parts .................................................. 459
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
......................... 197
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 153
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............. 355, 358
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 315
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 315
Oil Reset ....................................................... 111
11
background
466
Oil, Engine ........................................... 314, 358
Capacity .................................................... 358
Change Interval ......................................... 314
Dipstick ..................................................... 313
Disposal .................................................... 315
Filter ................................................ 315, 358
Filter Disposal ........................................... 315
Identification Logo ..................................... 315
Materials Added To ................................... 315
Recommendation ............................ 315, 358
Synthetic ................................................... 315
Viscosity .......................................... 315, 358
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................................... 9, 460
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 40
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 300
P
Paint Care
...................................................... 346
Parking Brake ................................................ 198
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 237
Passive Entry ................................................... 23
Pets ............................................................... 189
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........... 333
Power
Brakes
....................................................... 354
Door Locks .................................................. 22
Inverter........................................................ 99
Mirrors......................................................... 41
Steering..................................................... 215
Windows ...................................................... 59
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 360
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 159
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 292
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 159
R
Radial Ply Tires
............................................. 337
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 324
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 413
Radio Operation ................................... 411, 449
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 327
Rear Camera................................................. 247
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 143
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 237
Recreational Towing ..................................... 261
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 262
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
........................................... 263
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 356
Refrigerant .................................................... 318
Release, Hood ................................................. 86
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 154
Remote Control
Starting System ........................................... 16
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 21
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............13
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 441
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features .................................................. 18
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 18
Remote Starting System .................................. 16
Removable Doors ...................................... 27, 29
Front ............................................................ 27
Rear ............................................................. 29
Removing ......................................................... 60
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 277
Replacement Keys .................................... 13, 20
Replacement Tires ........................................ 339
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 459
Restraints, Child ............................................ 177
Restraints, Head .............................................. 36
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier .......................................... 106
Rotation, Tires ............................................... 344
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
........................ 190
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 192
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 459
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 329
Safety Tips .................................................... 189
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 189
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 306
background
467
Seat Belts ............................................ 154, 190
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 158
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......158
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................. 158
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............160
Child Restraints ......................................... 177
Energy Management Feature .................... 160
Extender .................................................... 159
Front Seat .............................. 154, 155, 157
Inspection ................................................. 190
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 157
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 158
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 155
Operating Instructions ............................... 157
Pregnant Women ...................................... 159
Pretensioners ............................................ 159
Rear Seat .................................................. 155
Reminder .................................................. 154
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 159
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 159
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 158
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 352
Seats ............................................................... 31
Adjustment .................................................. 31
Height Adjustment ....................................... 32
Rear Folding ................................................ 31
Tilting .......................................................... 31
Security Alarm ................................................. 20
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 358
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 19
Sentry Key Replacement .......................... 13, 20
Service Assistance ........................................ 457
Service Contract ........................................... 458
Service Manuals ........................................... 460
Shifting ......................................................... 203
Automatic Transmission .................. 203, 204
Manual Transmission ............................... 199
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 262
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ................................... 263
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 155
Side Step Removal ....................................... 264
Signals, Turn ............................... 192, 279, 280
Siri ................................................................ 454
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 413
Favorites................................................... 415
Replay ...................................................... 415
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 415
Favorites................................................... 415
Replay ...................................................... 415
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 343
Snow Tires .................................................... 340
Soft Top .................................................... 60, 79
Soft Top Windows ............................................ 79
Spare Tires ................................. 291, 340, 341
Spark Plugs ................................................... 358
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
.......................................... 358
Oil ............................................................. 358
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 222
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 227
Cancel....................................................... 223
Resume .................................................... 223
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............. 221, 223
Starting ......................................................... 193
Automatic Transmission ........................... 193
Button.......................................................... 14
Cold Weather ............................................ 196
Engine Block Heater ................................. 197
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 196
Manual Transmission ............................... 193
Remote ........................................................ 16
Starting And Operating .................................. 193
Starting Procedures ...................................... 193
Steering ........................................................... 38
Power........................................................ 215
Tilt Column................................................... 38
Wheel, Heated ............................................. 39
Wheel, Tilt .................................................... 38
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 441
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ............................................ 441
Stop/Start ............................................ 215, 218
Storage ..................................................... 79, 94
11
background
468
Storage, Vehicle ...................................... 58, 345
Store Radio Presets ....................................... 413
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 345
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 302
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic .................................................. 213
Sway Control, Trailer ...................................... 139
Synthetic Engine Oil ....................................... 315
System, Remote Starting ................................. 16
T
Tailgate............................................................ 87
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 38
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 57
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 38
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........333
Tire Markings ................................................. 329
Tire Safety Information .................................. 329
Tires................................... 192, 335, 340, 344
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 338
Air Pressure ............................................... 335
Chains ....................................................... 343
Changing ......................................... 289, 329
Compact Spare ......................................... 341
General Information ........................ 335, 340
High Speed ................................................ 336
Inflation Pressure ...................................... 336
Jacking ...................................................... 329
Life Of Tires ............................................... 338
Load Capacity .................................. 333, 334
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........ 147
Quality Grading ......................................... 344
Radial ....................................................... 337
Replacement ............................................ 339
Rotation.................................................... 344
Safety .............................................. 329, 335
Sizes......................................................... 330
Snow Tires ................................................ 340
Spare Tires ............................. 291, 340, 341
Spinning ................................................... 337
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 338
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 354
To Open Hood .................................................. 86
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 258
Top
Dual ............................................................. 60
Freedom ...................................................... 67
Hard ............................................................ 67
Soft.............................................................. 74
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................................................ 304
Towing ........................................ 253, 256, 303
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 303
Recreational ............................................. 261
Weight ...................................................... 256
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 261
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle .................................................. 212
Traction Control ............................................ 139
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 139
Trailer Towing ................................................ 253
Cooling System Tips .................................. 260
Hitches ..................................................... 255
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............... 256, 258
Wiring ....................................................... 259
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 256
Trailer Weight ................................................ 256
Transfer Case ................................................ 327
Fluid.......................................................... 360
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ...................... 209
Maintenance ............................................ 327
Transmission................................................. 204
Automatic ........................................ 204, 328
Fluid.......................................................... 360
Maintenance ............................................ 328
Manual ..................................................... 199
Shifting ..................................................... 203
Transporting Pets .......................................... 189
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 338
Turn Signals ......................................... 279, 280
U
UCI Connector
............................................... 442
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ................... 437
Phone Call Features ................................. 434
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 438
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 18
Uconnect Phone .......................... 430, 432, 433
background
469
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
...................... 436
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................436
Bluetooth Communication Link ................. 439
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ............435
Call Continuation ............................. 410, 437
Call Controls .............................................. 435
Call Termination ........................................ 437
Cancel Command ...................................... 430
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
......437
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................ 433
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device .............433
Dial By Saying A Number ........................... 435
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ...433
Far End Audio Performance ...................... 438
Help Command ......................................... 430
Join Calls ................................................... 437
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
................................................. 433
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
................................. 436
Managing Your Favorites ........................... 434
Natural Speech ......................................... 430
Operation .................................................. 429
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
........................................ 430
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
.................................................. 432
Pair Additional Mobile Phones .................. 432
Phonebook Download .............................. 434
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 436
Power-Up .................................................. 439
Recent Calls ............................................. 435
Redial ....................................................... 437
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 434
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 437
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 435
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . 437
Voice Command ....................................... 438
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ................... 435
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ...... 18, 23
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 23
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 344
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
..................................................... 442
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 158
V
Vanity Mirrors
.................................................. 41
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 354
Vehicle Loading ................................... 251, 334
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 9
Vehicle Storage ....................................... 58, 345
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................ 10
Navigation ................................................... 10
Operating Instructions ................................. 10
Searching User Guide .................................. 10
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 315
Voice Command ............................................ 450
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 450
W
Warnings And Cautions
...................................... 9
Warnings, Roll Over ............................................ 9
Warranty Information .................................... 459
Washers, Windshield .................................... 313
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 347
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 342
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 342
Wind Buffeting ................................................. 60
Window Fogging ............................................... 58
Window Storage ............................................... 79
Windows .......................................................... 59
Power........................................................... 59
Windshield
Folding ......................................................... 83
Windshield Defroster .................................... 190
Windshield Washers .............................. 45, 313
Fluid.......................................................... 313
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 320
Windshield Wipers ........................................... 45
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 320
11
background
2019_DODGE_JOURNEY_OM_LATAM=GUID-DD742392-D8BE-4B30-BA8F-C6FBB159C17D=1=es-xl.book Page 516
background
2019_DODGE_JOURNEY_OM_LATAM=GUID-DD742392-D8BE-4B30-BA8F-C6FBB159C17D=1=es-xl.book Page 516
background
2019_DODGE_JOURNEY_OM_LATAM=GUID-DD742392-D8BE-4B30-BA8F-C6FBB159C17D=1=es-xl.book Page 516
background
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
background
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2020 GLADIATOR
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_JT_OM_EN_USC
Second Edition V1
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2020 ALL-NEW GLADIATOR
owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
ALL-NEW
mopar.com/om

Specifications

Indexed Terms: Pickup Truck, Convertible

Jeep® 2020 Gladiator Questions and Answers

Find answers or ask new question.
Questions and Answers

Related Products

Product Jeep 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE SRT8 image
Jeep 2007 Grand Cherokee SRT8 Sport Utility 4D
2019-11-11 1 docs
Product DK2 84110 image
DK2 84110 Custom Mount Kit Jeep CJ-5/CJ-7 '72-'86, Jeep Scrambler/CJ-8 Pickup '81-'85
2026-05-08 1 docs
Product DK2 84105 image
DK2 84105 Custom Mount Kit for Jeep Cherokee 84-02 and Comanche Pickup 86-92, Enhances Versatility and Functionality
2026-05-08 1 docs
Product Vevor GZB80263 1100 12V image
Vevor GZB80263-1100 Electric Pickup Truck Crane with 360° Swivel, 1100 lbs Capacity for Construction and Factory Use
2026-05-05 1 docs
Product Vevor MSCAR 005 image
Vevor MSCAR-005 62-inch Tailgate Pad 6-Bike Pickup Truck Bed Tailgate Pad Protector Cover
2026-05-04 1 docs
Product Vevor HXCZDJ 07 image
Vevor HXCZDJ-07 Hydraulic Pickup Truck Crane Hoist Crane 500 lbs 360° Swivel Hoist Lift
2026-05-04 1 docs